diff --git a/tn_MRK.tsv b/tn_MRK.tsv index 3ae97d992e..39d0a2a6d9 100644 --- a/tn_MRK.tsv +++ b/tn_MRK.tsv @@ -63,7 +63,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 1:11 ogiw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν σοὶ εὐδόκησα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You please me” 1:12 mh8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ εὐθὺς 1 Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that” 1:12 yv6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει 1 Here Mark speaks as if **the Spirit** physically picked up Jesus and **casts him out** into the wilderness. He means that **the Spirit** compelled Jesus to go to the wilderness, although he did not force Jesus to go against his will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “compels him to go” or “leads him out” -1:12 b3kw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “cast him out” 1:13 k2kt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Satan was tempting him” 1:13 siu3 ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων 1 Alternate translation: “Jesus was living among the wild animals” 1:14 sp0r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” @@ -95,7 +94,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 1:20 zjz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **called them** to “come after him,” that is, to travel with him and be his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he called them to come after him” or “he called them to travel with him as his students” 1:20 b2ci ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 See how you expressed the similar clause “they followed him” in [1:18](../01/18.md). Alternate translation: “they became his disciples” or “they traveled with him as his students” 1:20 f77b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀπῆλθον 1 Here, **they** refers to James and John. It does not refer to the servants, who stayed in the boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to James and John more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John went away” -1:21 p7ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense εἰσπορεύονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they entered” 1:21 xu4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰσπορεύονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus and the four disciples he just called to follow him: Simon, Andrew, James, and John. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples enter” 1:21 guzx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς Σάββασιν 1 Here Mark uses the phrase **on the Sabbaths** to indicate that this event occurred on one specific Sabbath day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on one of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day” 1:22 bsc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ; ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And he was teaching them as having authority and not as the scribes. So, they were astonished at his teaching” @@ -138,7 +136,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 1:30 dxak rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship ἡ & πενθερὰ 1 The word **mother-in-law** refers to the mother of Simon’s wife. In your translation, you could use the term or expression in your own language for this relationship. 1:30 vnp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πυρέσσουσα 1 A **fever** is a symptom of an illness in which the temperature of the body temporarily increases. People with fevers feel sick and weak. If your reader would not be familiar with fevers, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate Translation: “having a high body temperature” or “being ill with an elevated temperature” 1:30 hysq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λέγουσιν 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people who were in the house of Simon and Andrew. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these people. Alternate translation: “some people who were in the house speak” -1:30 i5lk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they spoke” 1:31 bzd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause describes what Jesus did before what the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “having taken hold of her hand, he raised her up” 1:31 sff6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός 1 Here Mark speaks of **the fever** as if it were a person that **left her**. He means that she was no longer sick with the fever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “she was no longer sick with a fever” or “her fever was gone” 1:31 wi9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὁ πυρετός 1 See how you translated **fever** in [1:30](../01/30.md). Alternate translation: “the high body temperature” or “the elevated temperature” @@ -161,11 +158,9 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 1:35 y1bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out” 1:36 sy21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark is referring to other people who were there with **Simon** in the house, including Andrew, James, and John and probably other people who were staying there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer more explicitly to people who were staying at the house of **Simon**. Alternate translation: “the other people staying in his house” 1:36 emic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole κατεδίωξεν 1 Here Mark speaks as if **Simon and the ones with him** were hunting Jesus down or trying to capture him. He uses the word **pursued** as an overstatement to emphasize how urgently they were looking for Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “looked everywhere” or “diligently looked” -1:37 ol9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 1:37 p2s3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε 1 Here the disciples imply that they think that Jesus should come back with them to **All** the people who are **seeking** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “All are seeking you! Will you come back with us?” 1:37 o3hn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντες 1 Mark is using the adjective **All** as a noun to mean all the people in Capernaum. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “All people” 1:37 vgc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 Simon and those with him say **All** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “Very many” -1:38 eof0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 1:38 tzvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις, ἵνα καὶ ἐκεῖ κηρύξω; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐξῆλθον 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Because I went out to preach in many places, let us go elsewhere, into the surrounding towns, so that I may preach there also” 1:38 plm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ 1 Here Jesus implies that he will not go back to Capernaum to meet all the people who were looking for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Instead of going back to Capernaum, let us go elsewhere” 1:38 z53z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἐξῆλθον 1 Here Jesus does not start where he **went out** from. He may be referring to how he left Capernaum, or he may be referring to how he came to the world as a human being, or he may be implying to both of these meanings. If possible, do not indicate where Jesus **went out** from. Alternate translation: “I came” or “I went here” @@ -176,18 +171,15 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 1:39 sntp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people living in **Galilee**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish synagogues” or “the synagogues in that area”\n 1:40 wryd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτὸν λεπρὸς 1 Here Mark introduces **a leper** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man who was a leper. He comes to Jesus”\n 1:40 fn8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes” -1:40 qad5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “came” 1:40 kq50 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction γονυπετῶν 1 In the this man’s culture, **kneeling down** before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what **kneeling down** means. Alternate translation: “prostrating himself before him” or “bowing down to him in respect” 1:40 mwv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι 1 The man is using this statement to make a request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in request form. Alternate translation: “please make me clean” 1:40 uotm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit με καθαρίσαι 1 The man talks about becoming **clean** ceremonially, but it is implicit that he has become unclean because of his leprosy, so he is primarily asking Jesus to heal him of this disease. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to heal my disease” 1:41 l9jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having sympathized with him” 1:41 jz24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **having had compassion**. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts read “having become angry.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. -1:41 flc0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 1:41 qjz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θέλω 1 Here Jesus implies that he is **willing** to cleanse or heal the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am willing to cleanse you” 1:42 lc7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα 1 Here, Mark speaks of the man’s **leprosy** as if it were a person who **departed from him**. He means that the man no longer had **leprosy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his leprosy was gone” or “he was no longer a leper” 1:42 lkks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκαθερίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “he was clean” or “Jesus had made him clean” 1:43-44 iw7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events καὶ ἐμβριμησάμενος αὐτῷ, εὐθὺς ἐξέβαλεν αὐτόν & καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, ὅρα μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς; ἀλλὰ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 Jesus **strictly warned** the man using the words recorded in [1:44](../01/44.md) before he **sent him away**. It might be helpful to make it clear that Jesus **strictly warned** the man before he **sent him away**. Alternate translation: “While he was immediately sending him away, he strictly warned him by saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’” or “He immediately sent him away. Before he went, Jesus strictly warned him, saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’” -1:44 p8cu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 1:44 xc4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς 1 The implication is that the man is not to tell **anyone** that Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you tell no one that I healed you” 1:44 k2e0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς 1 The words translated **nothing** and **anyone** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “you certainly do not say anything to anyone” 1:44 xhu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 Jesus told the man to **show** himself **to the priest** so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest for inspection if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “ask to be inspected by the priest” or “let yourself be examined by the priest” @@ -204,7 +196,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 2:intro zhb5 0 # Mark 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n * Jesus heals a paralytic (2:1–12)\n * Jesus calls Levi and dines at his house (2:13–17)\n * Jesus brings something new (2:18–22)\n * Picking heads of grain on the Sabbath (2:22–28)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Sinners”\n\nWhen Mark uses the word “sinners,” he is describing a group of people whom many Jewish religious groups would have considered to be living in ways that were improper for those who were part of God’s people. Some of these people may have committed significant sins, while others may have disagreed with many of the Jewish religious groups about how Jews could properly behave. If possible, use a word or phrase that identifies people who are not living as many religious groups think that people should live. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Fasting and feasting\n\nIn Jesus’ culture, people would “fast,” or abstain from eating for a period of time, in order to honor God or to repent of their sins. They would “feast,” or eat a lot of food, when they were celebrating some important event, such as a wedding. Consider how you will refer to these behaviors in [2:15–22](../02/15.md), in which Jesus feasts and teaches about why he and his disciples do not fast. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])\n\n### The Sabbath\n\nIn the law that God gave to Moses, God commanded the Israelites to rest on the seventh day, which was called the Sabbath. The Jewish religious leaders disagreed with each other about what kinds of things a person could do on the Sabbath and still rest as God had commanded. In [2:22–28](../02/22.md), the Pharisees and Jesus engage in these kinds of debates about the Sabbath. Jesus disagrees with how the Pharisees understand the Sabbath, and he argues for a different view. If your readers may not understand what the Sabbath is and why Jesus and the Pharisees are debating about it, you may need to include some information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The short parables in [2:19–22](../02/19.md)\n\nIn these verses, Jesus gives three short parables that emphasize how certain things do not go well together. Fasting does not happen during a wedding celebration. An unshrunk piece of cloth does not make a good patch for an old garment. Old wineskins do not make good containers for fresh wine that still needs to ferment. Jesus tells these parables to illustrate how his ministry and preaching do not match well with how people had previously done things. In other words, Jesus wants people to expect what he does to be new, and this may require thinking and doing many new things. You should preserve these parables, since they are not direct metaphors. If necessary, you could introduce them in such a way that your readers recognize that they are parables or illustrations. See the notes on each verse for possible translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 17, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]]) 2:1 j6pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δι’ ἡμερῶν 1 Here, the phrase **after {some} days** indicates that the events Mark is about to narrate occurred a few, but not very many, days after the event he just narrated, the healing of the leper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that indicates that a few **days** passed between the previous event and this event. Alternate translation: “a few days later” 2:1 ir5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was people who were in **Capernaum**. Alternate translation: “the people there heard” -2:1 jmtf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐστίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he was” 2:1 afvi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Here Mark implies that this **house** was Jesus’ home while he was in Capernaum. This **house** could belong to: (1) Simon and Andrew, since he stayed at their house previously (see [1:29](../01/29.md)). Alternate translation: “in Simon and Andrew’s house” (2) Jesus and his relatives, who may have moved to Capernaum. Alternate translation: “in his house” 2:2 zja1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ 1 Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women” 2:2 pv8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered” or “came together”\n @@ -221,12 +212,10 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 2:4 v6ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι 1 In the region where Jesus lived, houses usually had flat roofs that could be reached by staircases on the outside of the houses. These roofs were usually made of wooden beams, branches, and packed dirt or clay. Here Mark describes how these people **dug** through the branches and clay to create a hole in the roof through which they could lower the paralytic on his mat. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of roof, you could use descriptive phrases, or you could use more general terms. Alternate translation: “they demolished the part of the flat roof above where he was, and having dug a hole in it, they lower” or “they cut a hole in the roof and lower through it” 2:4 rrvf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential ἐξορύξαντες 1 Here Mark uses the phrase **having dug {it} out** to indicate that they finished making a hole before they lowered the man down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this sequence more explicitly. Alternate translation: “once they had dug it out” or “after digging it out” 2:4 q22b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν 1 Here Mark implies that they first climbed up onto **the roof** before they **removed** it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they climbed onto the roof of the house where he was and removed it” -2:4 db7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense χαλῶσι 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they lowered” 2:4 ouxr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κράβαττον 1 A **mat** was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bed, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a stretcher” 2:4 b32f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὁ παραλυτικὸς 1 See how you translated the word **paralytic** in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “the paralyzed person” or “the person who could not move his limbs” 2:5 trg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having recognized that they were convinced that he could heal the paralytic” 2:5 u57m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how they trusted” -2:5 v1st rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 2:5 kuvm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ παραλυτικῷ 1 See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs” 2:5 hzg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 Here Jesus calls the paralytic **Child** to indicate that he cares for him. The word also implies that the paralytic was younger than Jesus. The paralytic was not actually Jesus’ son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that an older person would use to show that they care for a younger person. Alternate translation: “My friend” or “Young one”\n 2:5 lix5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφέωνται σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is Jesus. Alternate translation: “I forgive your sins” @@ -237,7 +226,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 2:7 sj6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός? 1 The scribes is using the question form to indicate that they are confident that only God can forgive sins. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one is able to forgive sins except one, God.” or “No one can ever forgive sins except one, God!” 2:8 h3zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus knew what the scribes were thinking even though they did not say it out loud. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having known in his spirit their thoughts,” 2:8 niy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **spirit** refers to inner parts of Jesus, the parts where he thought and willed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the inner part of Jesus or to Jesus more generally. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “in himself” -2:8 sj4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense διαλογίζονται & λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were debating … said” 2:8 wga7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the scribes. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “What you are debating in your hearts is wrong.” or “Stop debating in your hearts whether I am blaspheming!” 2:8 vfkd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular διαλογίζεσθε & ὑμῶν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the words **you** and **your** are plural. 2:8 s3m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated **hearts** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “in your heads” or “within yourselves” @@ -251,7 +239,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 2:10 jhy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular εἰδῆτε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the word **you** is plural. 2:10 jsyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, have” 2:10 uedr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίαν ἔχει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has been authorized” -2:10 m66x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 2:10 t8qy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ παραλυτικῷ 1 See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs” 2:11 wwzh σοὶ λέγω 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell the paralytic. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “Listen to me:” 2:11 f369 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative τὸν κράβαττόν σου 1 See how you translated **mat** in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “your stretcher” @@ -268,7 +255,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 2:14 xi5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants εἶδεν Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ Ἁλφαίου, καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον 1 Here Mark introduces a tax collector named **Levi** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “he saw a man who was called Levi, the son of Alphaeus. Levi was sitting at the tax collector’s office” 2:14 sc4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἁλφαίου 1 The word **Alphaeus** is the name of a man. 2:14 jhhz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον 1 Here Mark means that Levi worked as a tax collector. He would sit at **the tax collector’s office** and make sure that people paid their taxes to the Roman empire, who had control over this area. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who worked to collect taxes for the Romans at the tax collection office” -2:14 pc9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 2:14 ekv0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀκολούθει μοι & ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **Follow me** is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciple. Similarly, the phrase **he followed him** indicates that Levi did travel with Jesus and become his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be my disciple … he was his disciple” or “Come with me as my student … he went with him as his student” 2:15 e2bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ γίνεται 1 Here, the phrase **And it happens {that}** introduces something that happened soon after what Mark previously narrated. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that introduces an event that came soon after the previous event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,” 2:15 zafq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατακεῖσθαι 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “was sitting down to eat” or “was eating” @@ -276,9 +262,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 2:15 l0on rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν & πολλοὶ 1 The pronoun **they** could refer to: (1) the **tax collectors and sinners** who were dining with Jesus. Alternate translation: “the tax collectors and sinners were many” (2) Jesus’ **disciples**. Alternate translation: “his disciples were many” 2:15 bwv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **they were following him** indicates that these people were traveling with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were his disciples” or “they were traveling with him as his students” 2:16 rwu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe **scribes** who were also **Pharisees**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the scribes, ones who were Pharisees” or “some scribes, who were also Pharisees” -2:16 umxd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐσθίει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he was eating” 2:16 b1bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει? 1 The scribes of the Pharisees are using the question form to criticize what Jesus is doing. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “He has no reason to eat with tax collectors and sinners.” or “He should by no means eat with tax collectors and sinners!” -2:17 f6rl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 2:17 ak1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so sinners need to see Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the following sentence, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you could translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor, but people who are unwell do” 2:17 c62j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones having sickness have need of a physician” 2:17 lh4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who are sick” @@ -287,7 +271,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 2:17 ca4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners”\n 2:18 j1h2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,” 2:18 y7bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες & καὶ 1 Here Mark introduces background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “it happened that the disciples of John and the Pharisees were fasting. And”\n -2:18 zuo4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται καὶ λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they came and said” 2:18 z394 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔρχονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to some people who asked Jesus this question. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people without identifying who they are. Alternate translation: “certain people come” 2:18 nywl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων νηστεύουσιν, οἱ δὲ σοὶ μαθηταὶ οὐ νηστεύουσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this sentence into two sentences, one giving the reason for the question, and the other asking the question. Alternate translation: “The disciples of John and the disciples of the Pharisees fast. For what reason do your disciples not fast?” 2:19-20 l0f0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? ὅσον χρόνον ἔχουσιν τὸν νυμφίον μετ’ αὐτῶν, οὐ δύνανται νηστεύειν & ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ τότε νηστεύσουσιν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 To help the people who asked him the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers a brief illustration. He wants them to think of him as if he were a **bridegroom** and of his disciples as if they were the **sons of the bridal chamber**. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Jesus is like the **bridegroom**, and his disciples are like the the **sons of the bridal chamber**. Alternate translation: “The sons of the bridal chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? As much time as they have the bridegroom with them, they are not able to fast. But days will come when the bridegroom will be taken away from them, and in those days, then they will fast. I am like the bridegroom, and my disciples are like the sons of the bridal chamber.” @@ -341,7 +324,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 3:2 vr25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρετήρουν αὐτὸν & κατηγορήσωσιν 1 The pronouns **they** and **they** refer to the Pharisees who were there, as [3:6](../03/06.md) shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees were watching him closely … they might accuse” 3:2 dw2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς Σάββασιν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day” or “during a Sabbath day” 3:2 q35x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that they would **accuse** Jesus of breaking the Sabbath commandments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might accuse him of wrongdoing” or “they might accuse him of breaking the law of Moses”\n -3:3 ie14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 3:3 pi5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἔχοντι ξηράν 1 See how you expressed this idea in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “having the shriveled hand” or “whose hand was atrophied” 3:3 nm6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον 1 Here, the implication is that Jesus wanted this man to stand where everyone could see him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up where everyone can see you” 3:4 dujn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς & οἱ 1 Just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the pronouns **them** and **they** refer to the Pharisees who were there, as [3:6](../03/06.md) shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to the Pharisees … they” @@ -355,7 +337,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 3:5 thek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hardness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how hard their heart was” 3:5 n4ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, Jesus is speaking of the Pharisees’ **heart** as if it were characterized by **hardness**. He means that the Pharisees are stubborn and refuse to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their stubbornness” or “their unwillingness to listen”\n 3:5 zr89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “of their hearts”\n -3:5 wbjd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 3:5 itqu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρα σου 1 This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I heal you. Now stretch out your hand!” 3:5 c3qe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπεκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored his hand” or “his hand became healthy” 3:6 nmkb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out” @@ -381,7 +362,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 3:12 w7to rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Do not make me known.’” 3:12 wypa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν 1 Here, the phrase **make him known** refers to telling people who Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might not say who he was” or “they might not speak about him” 3:13 zq1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” -3:13 njw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἀναβαίνει & προσκαλεῖται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he went up … summoned” 3:13 dfy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἀναβαίνει 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “comes” instead of **goes**. Alternate translation: “he comes up” 3:13 fatx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τὸ ὄρος 1 Mark does not clarify what **mountain** this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain” 3:14 vjl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj δώδεκα 1 Mark is using the number **12** as a noun to mean 12 men. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “12 people” @@ -399,7 +379,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 3:18 tgmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate τὸν Καναναῖον 1 **Cananaios** is a word borrowed from Aramaic that describes someone as a “zealot,” that is, someone who is very zealous about something. You will need to decide if you will also borrow this word into your language or if you will translate the meaning. If you borrow the word, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then put the translation in a footnote. If you translate the word’s meaning, **Cananaios** could be: (1) a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the Patriot” (2) a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the Passionate One” 3:19 r3zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 Mark writes **who also handed him over** to provide some extra information about what Judas did to Jesus later. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “who would later also hand him over” 3:20 d9uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” -3:20 lfqz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται & συνέρχεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came … came together” 3:20 qy7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἔρχεται 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, comes” 3:20 whej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes” 3:20 jxr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἶκον 1 This is probably the same **house** that Mark mentioned in [2:1](../02/01.md). See how you expressed the idea there. Alternate translation: “Simon and Andrew’s house” or “his house” @@ -461,19 +440,15 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 3:31 c8oa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” 3:31 gef8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 These were Jesus' younger **brothers**. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you could use it here.\n 3:31 xxfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go” -3:31 ci25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “came” 3:31 d6w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξω στήκοντες 1 Here Mark implies that they are **standing outside** the house that Jesus is in, most likely the house mentioned in [3:20](../03/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “standing outside the house” or “standing outside the place where Jesus was teaching” 3:31 pu1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς αὐτὸν καλοῦντες αὐτόν 1 Here Mark means that Jesus’ mother and brothers sent a person to Jesus to ask him to come out and meet them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they sent a messenger to him to summon him” or “they had someone go in and tell him to come out” 3:32 n20m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου, ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they say to him that his mother and his mothers were seeking him outside” -3:32 yvek rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they said” 3:32 dkbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **Behold** is intended to draw the attention of Jesus and to ask him to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Excuse me” 3:32 tivd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοί σου 1 See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md). 3:32 kucs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants οἱ ἀδελφοί σου 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **your brothers**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “your brothers and your sisters.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. 3:32 lbfz ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε 1 Alternate translation: “want to see you outside” or “are outside, and they want to talk with you” -3:33 hkij rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 3:33 qe8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Jesus is using the question form to teach his audience about whom he considers to be part of his family. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Since Jesus answers the question in [3:34–35](../03/34.md), you should not include an implied answer here. Alternate translation: “I will inform you about whom I call my mother and my brothers.” or “Let me tell you whom I love as if they were my mother or my brothers.” 3:33 j6u0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md). -3:34 ebj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 3:34 j305 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ μου 1 Here, the word **Behold** indicates that the audience should look where Jesus looked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Consider these people to be my mother” or “These are my mother” 3:34 aw65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 Here Jesus speaks of **the ones sitting in a circle around him** as if they were his **mother** and **brothers**. He means that he considers them to be part of his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning of the metaphor more explicitly. Alternate translation: “those whom I call my mother and my brothers” or “the people I love as if they were my mother and my brothers” 3:34 bouy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md). @@ -539,7 +514,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 4:12 p4fv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλέποντες, βλέπωσι & ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι 1 Here the author of the quotation repeats the words **look** and **hear** in order to emphasize that the people really do **look** and **hear**. If your language can repeat words for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use that construction here in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “They will certainly look … they will certainly hear” or “They will indeed look … they will indeed hear” 4:12 p9yr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 The author of the quotation is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. So, to **turn back** would be to start listening to and obeying God again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might start obeying God again” 4:12 g14p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “they might receive forgiveness” or “God might give them forgiveness” -4:13 qtuo rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 4:13 fs1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You do not understand this parable. Because of that, you will not understand all the parables.” or “If you do not understand this parable, you cannot understand all the parables!” 4:14 m72p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 Here Jesus speaks about what **the word** as if it were what the **sower sows** in the parable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what the sower sows is like the word” 4:14 xdaj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 See how you translated “sow” in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “throws the word like seeds over the ground” or “scatters the word like seeds over the field” @@ -652,19 +626,15 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 4:33 kol8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀκούειν 1 Here Mark uses the word **hear** to refer to both hearing and understanding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to realize what he meant” 4:34 oo4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς & παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he was only speaking to them with a parable”\n 4:34 gp99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα 1 Here, the word **everything** refers to every parable that Jesus spoke to the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every parable” -4:35 fzew rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 4:35 jz5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 Here Jesus implies that he wants to go with the disciples **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee” 4:36 y2y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παραλαμβάνουσιν αὐτὸν 1 Here Mark implies that they took Jesus across the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they take him across the lake with them” -4:36 lezj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense παραλαμβάνουσιν αὐτὸν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they took him with them” 4:36 iybd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἦν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ 1 Here Mark means that Jesus was already in the boat, so they could leave right away (see [4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as he was already in the boat” or “using the boat he was sitting in” 4:36 z8gs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that other people got into **boats** and sailed with Jesus and his disciples across the lake. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “many people got into other boats to sail with him” -4:37 nddy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense γίνεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “happened” 4:37 fmgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπέβαλλεν εἰς 1 When waves are **breaking into** a boat, they are high enough that they come over the side of the boat and splash water into it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were coming over the sides into” 4:37 oad8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἤδη γεμίζεσθαι τὸ πλοῖον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the waves. Alternate translation: “the waves were already filling the boat” 4:38 cets rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἦν 1 Mark uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Jesus was **in the stern, sleeping**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “as for Jesus, he was” 4:38 uauq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῇ πρύμνῃ 1 The word **stern** is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back end of the boat” 4:38 lwed rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸ προσκεφάλαιον 1 A **cushion** is a soft object that person would lie or rest on. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of object, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the sleeping pad” or “a soft surface” -4:38 hw93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐγείρουσιν αὐτὸν καὶ λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they woke him up and said” 4:38 b4xb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα? 1 The disciples are using the question form to show Jesus that they are afraid and to convince him to do something to help them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “it should be a concern to you that we are perishing.” or “it is clearly not a concern to you that we are perishing!” 4:38 viz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ μέλει σοι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **concern**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “does it not concern you” 4:38 fu0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σοι 1 Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the word **you** here is singular. @@ -700,13 +670,11 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 5:6 w9zd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ 1 In the Jesus’ culture, bowing down to a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what bowing down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated himself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect” 5:7-8 ux6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge καὶ κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ λέγει, τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν, μή με βασανίσῃς & ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ, ἔξελθε, τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἀκάθαρτον ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:7](../05/07.md) and [5:8](../05/08.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason why the man cried out as he did before stating that the man cried out. Alternate translation: “And Jesus was saying to him, ‘Come out from the man, unclean spirit.’ So, crying out with a loud voice, he says, ‘What to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God? I make you swear by God, do not torment me.’” 5:7 x6qj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 Here, the phrase **crying out with a loud voice** means that the demon raised the volume of its voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly” -5:7 zfo5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 5:7 ppu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? 1 The man, controlled by the demon, is using the question form to insist on something urgently. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God!” 5:7 fatr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί 1 Here, the question **What to me and to you** asks whether **you** and **me** have anything in common or have any reason to be together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What do you and I have in common” or “What reason do you have to get involved with me” 5:7 kd19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 **Son of the Most High God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father. 5:7 urq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν 1 Here the man, controlled by the demon, puts Jesus under oath, or makes him **swear by God** that he will not **torment** him. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I make you swear before God” or “I require that you solemnly promise God” 5:8 ahtn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the man, controlled by the demon, acted as he did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “He said that because” or “That was because” -5:9 j3h0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 5:9 h6ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “We are many, so my name is Legion” 5:9 oa64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λεγιὼν 1 A **Legion** is the name of a group of about 6,000 soldiers. So, translate the word **Legion** with a word in your language that refers to a large number of soldiers. You could show that this was the name of the man by using the convention in your language for proper names. Alternate translation: “is Army” or “is Battalion” or “is Brigade” 5:9 pdyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 Here the demon indicates that he is speaking for many demons who are together controlling the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I and the other demons with me are many” @@ -730,7 +698,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 5:14 zser rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς 1 Here, the **city** is most likely Gerasa, since Jesus got out of the boat near this town (see [5:1](../05/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the town of Gerasa and in the countryside around it” 5:14 hlen rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were living **in the city and in the countryside**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in those places went out” 5:14 y60p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “they came out” -5:15 g25a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται & θεωροῦσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they came … saw” 5:15 yghh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go” 5:15 g5j1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον 1 Here Mark is referring to the man who had been **demon-possessed** until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the one who used to be demon-possessed” 5:15 jkqa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the demons possessed” @@ -748,7 +715,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 5:18 pup5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτὸν & ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please let me me be with you!’” 5:18 gbni rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ 1 Here Mark means that the man wanted to go wherever Jesus went, listen to what he said, and spend much time with him as a disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he might go with him” or “he might follow him” 5:19 m8oq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man wanted him to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But” -5:19 wssd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 5:19 p7iq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς σούς 1 Here, the phrase translated **your {people}** could refer to: (1) the man’s family, relatives, and friends. Alternate translation: “the people you know” (2) just the man’s family. Alternate translation: “your family” 5:19 dxnp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὅσα ὁ Κύριός σοι πεποίηκεν, καὶ ἠλέησέν σε 1 The phrases **has done for you** and **had mercy on you** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “as much as the Lord has done for you; yes, as much as he has had mercy on you” or “as much as the Lord has mercifully done for you” 5:19 h82t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Κύριός & πεποίηκεν 1 Here, the phrase **the Lord** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord, has done” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “I, the Lord, have done” @@ -762,10 +728,8 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 5:22 ilnk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “picture this” or “suddenly” 5:22 s3xe rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἔρχεται εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων ὀνόματι Ἰάειρος 1 Here Mark introduces the synagogue ruler as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “a man comes. He was one of the synagogue rulers, Jairus by name” 5:22 v1dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰάειρος 1 The word **Jairus** is the name of a man. -5:22 ser7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται & πίπτει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “came … he fell” 5:22 u1rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes” 5:22 ueds rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction πίπτει πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 In Jesus’ culture, falling at someone’s feet was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “he throws himself on the ground” or “he falls at his feet to show respect” -5:23 xeuz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense παρακαλεῖ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he begged” 5:23 oku2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said” 5:23 x9qg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἐσχάτως ἔχει 1 Jairus is uses the phrase **has {her} last** to indicate that his daughter is about to die. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is on her deathbed” or “will soon breath her last” or “will die soon” 5:23 jd27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα ἐλθὼν, ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces what Jairus wants Jesus to do in response to what Jairus has told him about his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduce a desired response to a situation. Alternate translation: “so I ask that you, coming, lay your hands on her” or “and so, coming, I wish that you will lay your hands on her” @@ -817,7 +781,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 5:34 sgvs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγός σου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how you were afflicted” 5:35 n9nm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus was **still** saying what Mark recorded in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He still saying those things” or “He still speaking to the woman” 5:35 gyx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go” -5:35 ahf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they came” 5:35 cxr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔρχονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to people who were at Jairus’ house. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “people come” 5:35 sau6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου 1 Here, **the synagogue ruler** represents the house of the synagogue ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the synagogue ruler’s home” 5:35 iftj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said” @@ -826,25 +789,20 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 5:36 r1jw παρακούσας 1 Here, the word translated **having overheard** could mean that Jesus: (1) listened in on the conversation between the messengers and Jairus. Alternate translation: “having listened in on” (2) ignored what the messengers told Jairus. Alternate translation: “having ignored” or “having disregarded” 5:36 edb0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον 1 Here, **word** represents what the messengers said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they spoke” or “the news they brought” 5:36 wuej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λαλούμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who came from Jairus’ house. Alternate translation: “that those people spoke” -5:36 p60b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 5:36 q8at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πίστευε 1 Here Jesus implies that Jairus, the **synagogue ruler**, should **believe** in Jesus, specifically that Jesus can help his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “believe in me” or “believe that I can save your daughter” 5:37 g616 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἀφῆκεν οὐδένα μετ’ αὐτοῦ συνακολουθῆσαι, εἰ μὴ τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he allowed only Peter and James and John the brother of James to accompany him” 5:37 kk98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Jairus, the synagogue ruler, went with Jesus as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “him and the synagogue ruler” or “him and Jairus” 5:37 pshl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου 1 Mark never says whether **James** or **John** was older, but he mentions **James** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **John** was younger. See how you expressed the idea in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “the younger brother of James” -5:38 nyix rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται & θεωρεῖ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came … he saw” 5:38 nb2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχονται 1 Here Mark implies that Peter, James, John, and Jairus were traveling with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they come” or “Jesus, Jairus, and the three disciples come” 5:38 pcgi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes” 5:38 flu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys θόρυβον, καὶ κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with **and**. The phrase **weeping and much wailing** explains what actions created the **commotion**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “a commotion, including weeping and much wailing” or “a commotion caused by weeping and much wailing” 5:38 u8ze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά 1 The terms **weeping** and **much wailing** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “very much mourning” or “a great deal of weeping” -5:39 y5kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 5:39 atr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “The child did not die but is sleeping. So, why are you being disturbed and weeping?” 5:39 a3ih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were at the house. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Stop being disturbed and weeping.” or “This is not a time to be disturbed and weeping!” 5:39 p5ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are you making a commotion” or “are you being noisy” 5:39 t35h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular θορυβεῖσθε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to many people in the house, the word **you** is plural. 5:39 dzrk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ παιδίον 1 Here, the word **child** refers to a very young woman. Mark clarifies in [5:42](../05/42.md) that she was about 12 years old. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to a girl who is about this age. Alternate translation: “The young girl”\n -5:40 w0f0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense παραλαμβάνει & εἰσπορεύεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “took along … he entered” 5:40 g8k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark is referring to the three disciples (Peter, James, and John) whom Jesus took with him (see [5:37](../05/37.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the three disciples” -5:41 kkqw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 5:41 hx3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ! ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον τὸ κοράσιον, σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε! 1 The phrase **Talitha, koum** is an Aramaic phrase. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he explained what it meant: **Little girl, I say to you, arise**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “‘Talitha, koum!’ which is Aramaic for, ‘Little girl, I say to you, arise.’” 5:41 igcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which we translate as,” 5:41 p3rp σοὶ λέγω 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell the **child**. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “listen to this:” @@ -864,7 +822,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:1 lpci rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν & ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went** or “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he came out … goes” 6:1 jcu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν 1 Here, the word **there** refers to the house of Jairus, the synagogue ruler. His house was in the town of Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from Jairus’ house” or “from Capernaum” 6:1 vf56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **his hometown** refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his hometown, Nazareth” -6:1 t7mm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἀκολουθοῦσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “were following” 6:2 qu8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus and what he said and did. Alternate translation: “he astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying” or “what he said astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying” 6:2 uf10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες 1 Here, the phrase translated **the many ones hearing him** could refer to: (1) the **many** people who were **hearing him**. In this case, all of the **many** people were astonished. Alternate translation: “all the many people hearing him” (2) **many** of the people who were **hearing him**. In this case, not all of the people were astonished. Alternate translation: “many of the ones hearing him” 6:2 xeh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said” @@ -893,7 +850,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:6 h8f8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς κώμας 1 Here Mark is referring to **the villages** in a specific area. He probably means the area near Nazareth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these villages are in a specific region. Alternate translation: “the villages of that region” 6:6 fs98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ 1 Here, the phrase **in a circle** indicates that Jesus went from village to village in the general pattern of a **circle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the villages in a circular pattern” or “around the villages, one by one,” 6:7 tdsp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” -6:7 kqa9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense προσκαλεῖται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he called” 6:7 fd56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν 1 Here, the phrase **began to send them out** indicates that Jesus prepared them for when he would **send them out**. The **Twelve** do not actually leave on their mission until [5:12](../05/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “prepared to send them out” or “began to get them ready to send them out” 6:7 d6sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δύο δύο 1 Here, the phrase **two by two** means that Jesus sent out **the Twelve** in six groups with **two** disciples in each group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in pairs” or “in sets of two” 6:7 ldbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he was empowering them to control the unclean spirits” @@ -1001,10 +957,8 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:29 k77n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” 6:30 u01i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. This event continues the story about how Jesus sent the twelve apostles out to drive out demons and to preach (see [6:7–13](../06/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Make sure that it is clear that Mark is continuing the story from earlier in the chapter. Alternate translation: “Now to return to the story,” or “Now” 6:30 cq4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνάγονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gather together” or “assemble” -6:30 ixz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense συνάγονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “were gathered together” 6:30 v44x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησαν καὶ ὅσα ἐδίδαξαν 1 The expression **everything, as much as they did and as much as they taught** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “as much as they did and taught” 6:31 o97p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, δεῦτε ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ κατ’ ἰδίαν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, καὶ ἀναπαύσασθε ὀλίγον & ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες πολλοί, καὶ οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the firs sentence describes. Alternate translation: “And the ones coming and the ones going were many, and they were not even having opportunity to eat. Therefore, he says to them, ‘You yourselves, come by yourselves to a desolate place and rest a little while.’” -6:31 vw04 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 6:31 bpmv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ 1 Jesus uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that he wants the disciples to come with him. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “As for you” 6:31 vu17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες 1 Here Mark means that many people were visiting the place where Jesus and the disciples were. Many people were visiting and many others were leaving all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the people visiting that place and then leaving” or “the people who were there” 6:31 y7sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **opportunity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they could not even find time to eat” or “they were so busy that they could not eat” @@ -1027,12 +981,10 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:36 ruhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀπόλυσον αὐτούς 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you send the them away” 6:36 essv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism τοὺς κύκλῳ ἀγροὺς καὶ κώμας 1 Here, Mark is referring to that whole region by naming its two primary parts, the **countryside** and the **villages**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the whole surrounding area” 6:37 cxcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” -6:37 odj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they said” 6:37 cts5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν? 1 The disciples are using the question form to show that Jesus’ command is absurd or impossible. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We cannot go away and buy 200 denarii of bread and give it to them to eat.” or “We could not go away and buy enough bread to give to them to eat even if we had 200 denarii!” 6:37 c65w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους 1 Here, the disciples are using the possessive form to describe **bread** that is worth **200 denarii**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “bread worth 200 denarii” or “bread with 200 denarii” 6:37 hs21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney δηναρίων διακοσίων 1 The word **denarii** refers to silver coins, each equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “200 silver coins” or “200 days’ wages” 6:38 rw5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples just implied about how impossible it would be for them to feed everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” -6:38 si8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει & λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … they said” 6:38 b90s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτους 1 The word **loaves** refers to loaves of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bread, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread” 6:38 n83x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπάγετε, ἴδετε 1 Here Jesus commands to the disciples to **Go** to where they kept their food and **See** how much they have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Check your supplies and note what you have” or “Go to where you keep your food and see what is there” 6:38 ssyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γνόντες 1 Here Mark implies that they knew how many loaves of bread they had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having known how many loaves they had” @@ -1053,9 +1005,9 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:41 q3mn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πᾶσιν 1 Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who were there. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “among all of them” 6:42 szop rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔφαγον πάντες 1 The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they all ate** refers to the crowds who were there. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the crowds all ate” or “all the groups of people ate” 6:42 wi2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages. Alternative translation: “until they were full” -6:43 rw83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κλάσματα δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰχθύων 1 Here Mark means that they filled the baskets with the leftovers from the meal, including **broken pieces** of bread and pieces **from the fish**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the broken pieces of bread and parts of fish, the fullness of 12 baskets” or “the leftover pieces of bread and fish, the fullness of 12 baskets” -6:43 bsvq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe **fullness** that consisted of **baskets** that were stuffed with **broken pieces**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enough to fill 12 baskets” or “which filled up 12 baskets” -6:43 bjou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fullness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “12 baskets full” +6:43 rw83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κλάσματα δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰχθύων 1 Here Mark means that they filled the baskets with the leftovers from the meal, including **broken pieces** of bread and pieces **from the fish**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the broken pieces of bread and parts of fish, the fillings of 12 baskets” or “the leftover pieces of bread and fish, the fillings of 12 baskets” +6:43 bsvq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe **fillings** that consisted of **baskets** that were stuffed with **broken pieces**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enough to fill 12 baskets” or “which filled up 12 baskets” +6:43 bjou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fillings**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “12 baskets full” 6:43 u5ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown δώδεκα κοφίνων 1 The word **baskets** refers to large circular containers that store food or other items. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “of 12 boxes” or “of 12 containers” 6:44 deov rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ 1 Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that helps the readers understand how amazing what Jesus did was. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for how many people were there,” or “In the end,” 6:44 v4m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τοὺς ἄρτους 1 See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “the large chunks of bread” @@ -1064,7 +1016,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:45 s6yp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ εὐθὺς 1 Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,” 6:45 o3wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 Here Mark implies that the disciples are sailing **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “across the sea to the opposite side” 6:45 y3ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βηθσαϊδάν 1 The word **Bethsaida** is the name of a town. It was located on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. -6:45 f3zr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἀπολύει τὸν ὄχλον 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “sent the crowd away” 6:46 hedu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the crowd that had eaten the bread and fish. Alternate translation: “to the crowd” (2) the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples” 6:46 fovx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τὸ ὄρος 1 Mark does not clarify what **mountain** this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain” 6:47 ff7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὀψίας γενομένης 1 Mark indicated that it was late in the day earlier in the story (see [6:35](../06/35.md)). Here, he uses a similar phrase but implies that it was later on in the evening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes a time later than the time described in [6:35](../06/35.md). Alternate translation: “when it was even later in the evening” or “further into the evening”\n @@ -1076,7 +1027,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:48 k087 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦν & ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς 1 When**wind** is **against** people in a boat, that means that it is blowing directly opposite to the direction in which the boat is traveling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the wind was opposite to the direction they were sailing” or “the wind was blowing directly against them” 6:48 g7ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown περὶ τετάρτην φυλακὴν τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Here, the phrase **about the fourth watch of the night** refers to the period of time between 3:00 AM and 6:00 AM. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to this period of time. Alternate translation: “in the last part of the night” or “shortly before dawn” 6:48 nbw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes” -6:48 sjv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came” 6:48 wpbk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης 1 Here Mark means that Jesus was miraculously **walking** on the surface of **the sea**. He did not sink into the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “walking on the surface of the sea” or “miraculously walking on top of the sea” 6:48 b0vo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤθελεν παρελθεῖν αὐτούς 1 Here, the clause **he was wishing to pass by them** could indicate that: (1) Jesus intended to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he intended to pass them by” (2) it looked like Jesus was going to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he was about to pass by them” or “it looked like he was going to pass by them” 6:49-50 pi8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge οἱ, δὲ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπατοῦντα, ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάντασμά ἐστιν, καὶ ἀνέκραξαν & πάντες γὰρ αὐτὸν εἶδον, καὶ ἐταράχθησαν & ὁ δὲ εὐθὺς ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, θαρσεῖτε, ἐγώ εἰμι; μὴ φοβεῖσθε 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:49](../06/49.md) and [6:50](../06/50.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to give all the reasons why the disciples **cried out** before stating that they **cried out**. Alternate translation: “But they, having seen him walking on the sea, thought that he is a ghost. In fact, they all saw him and were troubled. So, they cried out. But immediately he spoke with them and says to them, ‘Take courage! It is I! Do not be afraid!’” @@ -1087,7 +1037,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 6:50 lr8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the disciples cried out (see [6:49](../06/49.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “because” or “which they did because” 6:50 xph7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐταράχθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were very nervous” or “were very anxious” 6:50 st68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 The expression **spoke with them and says to them** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “says to them” or “spoke to them” -6:50 nue5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 6:50 et5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θαρσεῖτε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous” 6:51 vfo6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo λείαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο 1 The expression **they were very amazed within themselves** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “they were very amazed” 6:51 s26w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λείαν & ἐξίσταντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they marveled very much” @@ -1123,9 +1072,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 7:1 e2ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων 1 Here Mark could be implying that: (1) both **the Pharisees** and **the scribes** came **from Jerusalem**. Alternate translation: “having come from Jerusalem, the Pharisees and some of the scribes are being gathered to him” (2) only **the scribes** came **from Jerusalem**. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees and some of the scribes who came from Jerusalem are being gathered to him” 7:1 j32n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone” 7:1 ye06 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνάγονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are gathering” or “are coming together” -7:1 hpxv rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense συνάγονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “were being gathered” 7:2 ea9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἰδόντες τινὰς τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ὅτι & ἐσθίουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **that they eat** refers directly back to the phrase **some of his disciples**. Mark expresses the idea in this way to introduce whom the Pharisees and scribes saw and then explain what they saw them doing. If referring to who were seen and then referring back to them with the phrase **that they eat** would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “having seen some of his disciples eating” -7:2 ldyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐσθίουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they ate” 7:2 a7xf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐσθίουσιν τοὺς ἄρτους 1 The Pharisees and scribes are using **bread** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they eat their meals” 7:2 tmyd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κοιναῖς χερσίν, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις 1 Here Mark explains that **defiled hands** are hands that are **unwashed**. Consider how you might include an explanation like this. Alternate translation: “with unwashed hands, which are defiled” or “with defiled—that is to say, unwashed—hands” 7:3 mj6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background γὰρ 1 Here Mark introduces background information that will help readers understand why the Pharisees and scribes are interested in whether Jesus’ disciples wash their hands. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “that was important to them because” or “now you should know that” @@ -1145,7 +1092,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 7:4 x44f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown χαλκίων 1 Here, the word translated as **copper vessels** refers to any household container made out of **copper** or copper alloys such as brass or bronze. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “metal serving dishes” or “bronze pots” 7:4 wa3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants χαλκίων 1 Some ancient manuscripts do not include any other items after the **copper vessels**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the phrase “and beds” after the words **copper vessels**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. 7:5 tn2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ ἐπερωτῶσιν αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to express the relationship between this verse, the explanatory information in verses 3–4, and the statement in verse 2. See the note at the beginning of this chapter on verses 1–2. -7:5 a67u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐπερωτῶσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “asked” 7:5 et51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ κοιναῖς χερσὶν ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον? 1 The Pharisees and the scribes are using the question form to rebuke Jesus for what his disciples are doing. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Your disciples should walk according to the tradition of the elders, and they should not eat bread with unwashed hands.” or “We are shocked that your disciples do not walk according to the tradition of the elders, instead eating bread with unwashed hands!” 7:5 hts4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Here the Pharisees and the scribes speak of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do your disciples not behave according to the tradition of the elders” or “do your disciples not live according to the tradition of the elders” 7:5 wtli rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου 1 Because the Pharisees and the scribes are talking to Jesus, the word **your** is singular. @@ -1211,7 +1157,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 7:17 cfzl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche εἰσῆλθεν 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, entered” 7:17 l7d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου 1 Here Mark implies that when Jesus **entered into a house**, he was avoiding or getting away from **the crowd**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “where they were not with the crowd” or “to avoid the crowd” 7:17 vkui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τὴν παραβολήν 1 Here the disciples ask Jesus to explain **the parable** about things that go into and out of a person (see [7:15](../07/15.md)). Alternate translation: “the parable about what goes into a person” -7:18 nfmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 7:18 z8w1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples for how they still do not understand what he is saying. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I can tell that you also are without understanding.” or “I am amazed that you also do not understand!” 7:18-19 txj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὐ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι & ὅτι οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν, καὶ εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται? 1 Jesus is using the question form to remind his disciples about what happens to the food that people eat. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should already understand that everything that enters into the man from outside is not able to defile him, because it does not go into his heart, but into the stomach, and passes out into the latrine (making all foods clean).” or “You already know that everything that enters into the man from outside is not able to defile him, because it does not go into his heart, but into the stomach, and passes out into the latrine (making all foods clean)!” 7:18 yqve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 Here Jesus is referring to food and drink, which are **outside** a person and enter **into the man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in [7:15](../07/15.md). Alternate translation: “all food and drink, entering into him,” or “everything outside the man, being eaten by him,” @@ -1270,7 +1215,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 7:27 cjec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν 1 Here, Jesus implies that the bread is thrown **to the little dogs** so that they can eat it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to throw it to the little dogs for them to eat” 7:27 p3e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τοῖς κυναρίοις 1 Here, the phrase **little dogs** could describe: (1) domesticated animals that eat pests and can protect houses and families. You could use the name of a similar animal in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to the domesticated animals” or “to the guard animals” (2) scavenging animals that were generally considered unclean and dirty. You could use the name of a similar animal in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to the scavenging animals” or “to the dirty animals” 7:28 xgl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what the woman says in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” or “Yet” -7:28 x4nx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 7:28 k43f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ναί 1 Here, the woman uses the word **Yes** to indicate that she understands and agrees with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Yes, I agree” or “Yes, that is true” 7:28 ddof rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 2 Here, the word **and** introduces the woman’s further explanation of what Jesus said about children and little dogs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **and** untranslated. Alternate translation: “but it is also true” or “yet even further,” 7:28 na7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκάτω τῆς τραπέζης ἐσθίουσιν ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν παιδίων 1 To ask Jesus to help her, the woman offers a story or illustration based on the parable that Jesus told in [7:27](../07/27.md). In the story, the **little dogs** represent non-Jewish people, and the **crumbs** represent the help that Jesus gives to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is a story with a specific message, or you could explain what the parable means. Alternate translation: “here is a similar story: the little dogs under the table eat from the crumbs of the children” or “the little dogs under the table eat from the crumbs of the children. That is what helping me would be like” @@ -1290,14 +1234,12 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 7:31 cxa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 The word **Decapolis** is a name for a region to the southeast of Galilee. The name means “the Ten Towns.” See how you translated this name in [5:20](../05/20.md). 7:32 v23f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants φέρουσιν αὐτῷ κωφὸν καὶ μογιλάλον 1 Here Mark introduces a man who is **deaf and barely able to speak** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man there who was deaf and barely able to speak. They bring him to Jesus” or “they bring to him a man. He was deaf and barely able to speak” 7:32 fa0c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns φέρουσιν & παρακαλοῦσιν 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “certain people bring … they beg” -7:32 c5y0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense φέρουσιν & παρακαλοῦσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they brought … they begged” 7:32 m7xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please lay your hand on him’” 7:32 jlj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα 1 Here the people are implying that they want Jesus to **lay his hand on him** to heal the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he would lay his hand on him and heal” or “he, by laying his hand on him, would heal him” 7:33 jdfn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔβαλεν τοὺς δακτύλους αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰ ὦτα αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **put** one finger from one of his hands into one of the man’s **ears**, and he **put** one finger from the other hand into the man’s other ear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he put a finger in both of the man’s ears” 7:33 ld3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo πτύσας 1 Here Mark does not state where Jesus **spit**. He may have spit on the ground, on his own fingers, or on the man’s tongue. If possible, do not state where exactly Jesus spit. Alternate translation: “having spit saliva” 7:34 hu66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 In Jesus’ culture, most people thought that heaven was up above the earth. Looking up towards heaven was a common posture for someone who was praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a common posture for prayer in your culture, or you could explain the meaning of this posture. Alternate translation: “having raised his arms in prayer” or “having looked up to heaven to pray” 7:34 iyxe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἐστέναξεν 1 When Jesus **sighed**, it could indicate that he was praying deeply, that he felt compassion for the man, or that healing the man required much energy or power. If possible, use a general word or phrase that refers to someone breathing deeply in or out. Alternate translation: “he breathed deeply” or “he exhaled loudly” -7:34 jndd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 7:34 xh89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφφαθά, ὅ ἐστιν, διανοίχθητι 1 Here Mark provides an explanation of what **Ephphatha** means. Use a form that shows that Mark is explaining what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “‘Ephphatha!’—that is, ‘Be opened.’” or “‘Ephphatha!’ That is translated, ‘Be opened!’” 7:34 lbw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate ἐφφαθά 1 The word **Ephphatha** is an Aramaic word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language. 7:34 q6qk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διανοίχθητι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Open” or “Become open” @@ -1318,7 +1260,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:1 rmd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Here, the phrase **In those days** introduces the next major event in the story. It does not indicate how soon after the previous event this new event occurred. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Later during those days” or “During one of those days” 8:1 sn4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Here, Mark uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that identifies a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “During that time” 8:1 m327 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 The phrase **those days** refers to the time period when Jesus in the region of the Decapolis, on the southeastern side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was in the region of the Decapolis” -8:1 sgv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 8:2 gsez rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “The crowd is remaining with me already three days and does not have anything that they might eat, so I have compassion on them” 8:2 drmz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I sympathize with” 8:3 u3mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if he sent the people **away to their home hungry**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine that I were to send them away to their home hungry. In that case, they would faint on the way” @@ -1331,7 +1272,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:5 lcov rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἠρώτα αὐτούς, πόσους ἔχετε ἄρτους? οἱ δὲ εἶπαν, ἑπτά 1 It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “he asked them how many loaves they had. And they said that they had seven” 8:5 qm6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτους 1 See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread” 8:5 p7k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἑπτά 1 The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We have seven loaves” -8:6 pk52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense παραγγέλλει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he commanded” 8:6 x2jr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would usually **recline**, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “to get ready to eat on the ground” 8:6 iwre rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτους 1 See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread” 8:6 sygx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου 1 Here Mark means that Jesus **broke** the loaves of bread in pieces so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in [6:41](../06/41.md). Alternate translation: “he divided the loaves into servings and was giving them” or “he broke the loaves into smaller pieces and was giving the pieces” @@ -1357,7 +1297,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:11 hb7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal πειράζοντες αὐτόν 1 Here, the word **testing** introduces the purpose for which the Pharisees came to Jesus and were seeking a sign from heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to him” 8:12 sn5a ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 When Jesus **sighed greatly**, it indicated that he was sad and upset about what the Pharisees had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to how people in your culture express sadness or frustration nonverbally, or you could explain the meaning of what Jesus did. Alternate translation: “having breathed out loudly” or “having shown that he was upset by sighing greatly” 8:12 s8xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **spirit** refers to the nonphysical part of people. Mark means that Jesus **sighed** inwardly, to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in his heart” or “within himself” -8:12 uno5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” 8:12 plu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον 1 Jesus is speaking about his audience in the third person instead of directly addressing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person here instead. Alternate translation: “Why do you who are of this generation seek a sign? Truly I say to you, if a sign will be given to you who are of this generation …” 8:12 g4lz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Pharisees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “This generation has no reason to seek a sign.” or “I am surprised that this generation seeks a sign!” 8:12 l335 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ & τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ 1 Here, **generation** represents the people who are part of the **generation**, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do today’s people seek … to today’s people” or “do the people of this generation seek … to the people of this generation” @@ -1382,7 +1321,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:16 uqra rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι 1 Here, the word translated **that** could introduce: (1) what the disciples **were reasoning**. Alternate translation: “and saying that” (2) what the disciples think might be the reason for why Jesus said what he did about yeast. Alternate translation: “that Jesus had said that because” 8:16 kh1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἄρτους οὐκ 1 See how you translated **bread** in [8:14](../08/14.md). Alternate translation: “nothing to eat” 8:16 zfw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἄρτους οὐκ 1 Mark says **no** here as an overstatement for emphasis. The disciples do have one loaf of bread (see [8:14](../08/14.md)) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “almost no bread” or “only one loaf of bread” -8:17 uoe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 8:17 hnh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “It is wrong for you to be reasoning that you do not have bread. You do not yet perceive nor understand. Your hearts have become hardened.” or “Do not reason that you do not have bread! I am disappointed that you do not yet perceive nor understand! Your hearts have become hardened!” 8:17 dmt2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε 1 The terms **perceive** and **understand** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet know” or “Do you not yet perceive” 8:17 wf6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? 1 Here Jesus is implying that the disciples do not **perceive** or **understand** who Jesus is and what he can do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet perceive who I am, nor understand what I can do” @@ -1400,22 +1338,19 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:19 t7ig rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους 1 Jesus is using the number **5,000** as a noun to mean 5,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 5,000 men” 8:19 xppw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κοφίνους κλασμάτων πλήρεις ἤρατε 1 Here Jesus means that the disciples filled the **baskets** with the leftovers from the meal, including **broken pieces** of bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “baskets full of broken pieces of bread did you collect” or “baskets full of leftover pieces of bread did you take up” 8:19 v6lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κοφίνους 1 See how you translated **baskets** in [6:43](../06/43.md). Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers” -8:19 zblz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “They said” 8:19 y0h5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis δώδεκα 1 The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We took up 12 baskets full” 8:20 ji16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτε καὶ 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus is speaking again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Then he said, ‘And when” 8:20 gxwi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τοὺς ἑπτὰ εἰς τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I broke the seven for the 4,000” 8:20 h45u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἑπτὰ 1 Jesus is using the number **seven** as a noun to mean seven loaves. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the seven loaves” 8:20 lip5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους 1 Jesus is using the number **4,000** as a noun to mean 4,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 4,000 individuals” -8:20 hzgx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα κλασμάτων 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **fullness** that consisted of **baskets** that were stuffed with **broken pieces**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets containing broken pieces” or “how many baskets, each one filled with broken pieces,” -8:20 q3f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fullness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets full” +8:20 hzgx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα κλασμάτων 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **fillings** that consisted of **baskets** that were stuffed with **broken pieces**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets containing broken pieces” or “how many baskets, each one filled with broken pieces,” +8:20 q3f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fillings**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets full” 8:20 wvmn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σπυρίδων 1 See how you translated **baskets** in [8:8](../08/08.md). Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers” 8:20 tdnl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κλασμάτων 1 Here Jesus is referring to **broken pieces** of bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of broken pieces of bread” or “of broken pieces of leftover bread” -8:20 i5wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they said” 8:20 jfbq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἑπτά 1 The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We took up seven baskets full” 8:21 kh42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὔπω συνίετε? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. See how you expressed the simialr rhetorical question in [8:17](../08/17.md). Alternate translation: “You should understand by now.” or “I am disappointed that you do not yet understand!” 8:21 kmt0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πῶς οὔπω συνίετε? 1 Here Jesus is implying that the disciples do not **understand** who Jesus is and what he can do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar idea in [8:17](../08/17.md). Alternate translation: “How do you not yet understand who I am and what I can do” 8:22 q45u rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” -8:22 h4pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται & φέρουσιν & παρακαλοῦσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they came … they brought … begged” 8:22 c92c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go” 8:22 mul4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βηθσαϊδάν 1 The word **Bethsaida** is the name of a town. It was located on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you referred to this town in [6:45](../06/45.md). 8:22 t5ho rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns φέρουσιν 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “certain people bring” or “some people bring” @@ -1447,7 +1382,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:28 v870 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄλλοι -1 The disciples are using the adjectives **others** and **others** as nouns to mean various groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “others among the people … others among the people” 8:28 vpwv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἷς τῶν προφητῶν 1 Here the disciples are not excluding **John the Baptist** or **Elijah** from the group of the prophets. Instead, they are referring to the many other prophets that God had sent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “another one of the prophets” 8:29 czb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς & σὺ 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word **you** in the phrase **who do you say** is plural. Because Peter is speaking to Jesus, the word **You** in the clause **You are the Christ** is singular. -8:29 h24a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 8:30 rgy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he strongly warned them, ‘Tell no one about me’” 8:30 tcdq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus warned the disciples to **tell no one about** who he really was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that he was the Christ” or “about his true identity” 8:31 lvfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτοὺς ὅτι δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν, καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘It is necessary for the Son of Man to suffer many things and to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes and to be killed and to rise up after three days’” @@ -1461,7 +1395,6 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:33 ri3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus did in contrast to what Peter wanted him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” 8:33 ddeh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **looked at** all the other **disciples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the rest of his disciples” 8:33 bski rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐπετίμησεν Πέτρῳ καὶ λέγει 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **says** indicates how Jesus **rebuked Peter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “rebuked Peter by saying” -8:33 jd6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” 8:33 z6f1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ, ὅτι οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “You are not considering the things of God, but the things of men. So, get behind me, Satan!” 8:33 nu32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου 1 Here Jesus speaks as if he wants Peter to **Get behind** him. He means that Peter should not rebuke him but should instead accept what Jesus says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not stand in my way” or “Do not rebuke me”\n 8:33 ltyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὕπαγε & οὐ φρονεῖς 1 Because Jesus is speaking to Peter, the command **Get** and the word **you** are singular. @@ -1503,266 +1436,483 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General 8:38 fo9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅταν ἔλθῃ 1 Here Jesus implies that he, **the Son of Man**, will come back to this world at some point in the future. He is also implying that he will leave this world before he comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some or all of those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he comes back to this world” or “when, after leaving this world, he comes back” 8:38 hpc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with the holy angels in a way that his Father has made glorious” or “with the holy angels as one who is as great as his Father” 8:38 s5tm rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 **Father** is an important title that describe the relationship between God the **Father** and Jesus his Son. -9:intro n92j 0 # Mark 9 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Transfigured”\n\nScripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Hyperbole\n\nJesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so that his hearers would pay close attention to what he was saying and realize how important it is to avoid sin.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Elijah and Moses\n\nElijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md)). +9:intro n92j 0 # Mark 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Progress toward Jerusalem; Jesus repeatedly predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27–10:52)\n * Jesus is transfigured (9:1–8)\n * Jesus and the disciples discuss Elijah (9:9–13)\n * Jesus heals a demon-possessed boy (9:14–29)\n * Jesus predicts his suffering and death (9:30–32)\n * Jesus teaches about how his disciples should behave (9:33–50)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “transfigured”\n\nIn [9:1–8](../09/01.md), Mark describes how Jesus was “transfigured.” This word indicates that Jesus looked very different to the disciples. Mark does not tell us all the ways in which Jesus looked different, but he does say that Jesus’ clothes became extremely white. What this means is that the disciples were able to see some of the glory and majesty that Jesus has as God’s Son. Make sure that your translation shows that Jesus looked great and glorious.\n\n### Elijah\n\nWhen Jesus was transfigured, the disciples saw Moses and Elijah talking with him. Later, they ask Jesus about Elijah. They refer specifically to what the scribes say about a prophecy in [Malachi 4:5–6](../mal/04/05.md), which indicates that God will send “Elijah” to prepare the way before God comes to judge his enemies and reward his people. Malachi is referring to a prophet who lived even earlier. This prophet, named Elijah, performed many miracles and spoke messages from God (see [1 Kings 17–19](../1ki/17/01.md) and [2 Kings 2:1–17](../2ki/02/01.md)). The disciples ask about whether this Elijah is supposed to come before the Messiah does. Jesus says that this is true, and he talks about this “Elijah” in a way that shows the disciples that John the Baptist was “Elijah.” He means that John fulfills the prophecy in Malachi that someone like the prophet Elijah will prepare the way before God comes to judge and reward people. If your readers would not know the prophecy in Malachi or the stories about the prophet Elijah, you may need to include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Hyperbole\n\nIn [9:43–48](../09/43.md), Jesus commands his disciples to cut off or throw out body parts that cause them to sin. He uses this extreme example of resisting sin in order to show his disciples how serious sin really is. He does not mean that believers should always cut off body parts when they sin. Jesus intends his commands to be shocking, however, so you should preserve the extreme language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Jesus’ commands are extreme language.\n\n### Stumbling\n\nIn [9:42–47](../09/42.md), Jesus discusses people and things that cause “stumbling”. He uses this term to refer to sinning. See the notes on these verses for translation options.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in conversations, and many of the conversations are with one person. Because of this, the majority of the forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. So, you should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 5, 19, and 35. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])\n\n### The allusion to Isaiah 66:24 in verse 48\n\nIn verse 48, Jesus uses words that are very similar to words in [Isaiah 66:24](../isa/66/24.md). However, Jesus does not introduce his words as a quotation. So, Jesus is not directly quoting from Isaiah, but he intended his audience to think of [Isaiah 66:24](../isa/66/24.md) when they heard what he said. If your readers would not think of [Isaiah 66:24](../isa/66/24.md), you could refer to it in a footnote.\n\n### Verses 44 and 46\n\nSome of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for [9:44](../09/44.md) and [9:46](../09/46.md). Some early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words in each verse: “where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched.” Since these words also appear in all of the manuscripts in [9:48](../09/48.md), it is likely that people who copied the manuscripts accidentally or intentionally added these words earlier as verses 44 and 46. Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 9:1 q4b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state who **he** refers to in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying to them” -9:1 ad4e ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 See how you translated the statement **Truly, I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md). -9:1 xm40 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Here, the pronoun **you** is plural, in the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, and **you** refers to everyone to whom Jesus is speaking. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “Truly, I say to all of you” -9:1 kg4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 The phrase **taste death** is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” -9:1 qloy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” -9:1 ymou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God having come powerfully” -9:1 yjf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 The phrase **the kingdom of God having come with power** represents God showing himself as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. The phrase **the kingdom of God having come with power** probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in [9:2–10](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” -9:2 uf5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους 1 Mark uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were **alone** and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. -9:2 krt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been” -9:2 b3bb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase **he was transfigured before them** with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them” -9:3 gp48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι 1 The word **launderer** refers to a person who worked with cloth to clean and bleach cloth and clothing. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of the word **launderer**, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who bleached cloth could make them” -9:4 f2d6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἠλείας 1 The word **Elijah** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Mark 6:15](../mrk/06/15.md). -9:4 r3uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. -9:4 pj3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες 1 Here, the word **they** refers to Elijah and Moses. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with” -9:4 sh7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the passive phrase **were seen** with an active form. Alternate translation: “And they saw Elijah and Moses” -9:4 y9r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. -9:5 w6vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the word **answering** is used to introduce Peter into the conversation. Peter was not answering a question. -9:5 iqc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι 1 Here, the pronoun **us** could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case **us** would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. -9:5 k3y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σκηνάς 1 These **tents** were simple, temporary places with roofs under which to sit or sleep. -9:6 r3bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο 1 This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. +9:1 ad4e ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his audience. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the truth and importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” +9:1 lsa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to everyone who was there, the word **you** here is plural. +9:1 kg4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 The phrase **taste death** is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not experience death” +9:1 qloy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” +9:1 f95z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” +9:1 yjf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν 1 Here Jesus speaks as if **the kingdom of God** were a person who could **come**. He means that God will establish or begin his **kingdom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God having been inaugurated” or “the kingdom of God having begun” +9:1 ymou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a powerful way” +9:2 t08m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ μετὰ ἡμέρας ἓξ 1 Here, the phrase **And after six days** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Then, after six days had passed” or “Six days after those things happened” +9:2 uf5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους 1 The terms **by themselves** and **alone** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “completely alone” or “totally by themselves” +9:2 krt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μετεμορφώθη 1 The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “his appearance was changed” or “he began to look different” +9:2 b3bb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Mark could be implying that: (1) Jesus did the action. Alternate translation: “he transfigured himself” (2) God did the action. Alternate translation: “God transfigured him” +9:2 jjlt ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 Alternate translation: “in front of them” or “as they watched” +9:3 gp48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι 1 The word **launderer** refers to a person who worked with cloth to clean and bleach cloth and clothing. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of the word **launderer**, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who washed cloth could make them” +9:4 f2d6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they saw Elijah with Moses” +9:4 r3uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “by Peter, James, and John” +9:4 pj3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες 1 Here, the word **they** refers to Elijah and Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with” +9:5 w6vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀποκριθεὶς 1 Here, the word **answering** indicates that Peter was responding to what he saw. He was not answering a question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response to seeing those things”\n +9:5 iqc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, Peter could mean: (1) everyone who was there, including himself, the other two disciples, Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “for us all” (2) just himself and the other two disciples. Alternate translation: “for us disciples” +9:5 i0iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ποιήσωμεν 1 By **us**, Peter here means himself and the other two disciples, not Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. So, use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.\n +9:5 k3y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σκηνάς 1 The term **tents** means simple, temporary places in which to sit or sleep. Peter probably had in mind that they would build them from the materials available on the mountain such as tree branches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of temporary shelter. Alternate translation: “booths” +9:6 r3bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο 1 This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now as a matter of fact, he did not know what he should answer, for they were terrified” +9:6 w4qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὐ & ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because they were terrified, he did not know what he should answer” 9:6 f8hn ἔκφοβοι & ἐγένοντο 1 Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid” -9:7 e3id ἐγένετο & ἐπισκιάζουσα αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “appeared and covered them” -9:7 x4mv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης 1 Mark speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come from the cloud to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the cloud and said” -9:7 ybu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus. Here, the word **Son** describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. -9:7 lg0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀκούετε 1 **Listen** is a command or instruction God gave to Peter, James, and John. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. -9:8 hq73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐκέτι & εἶδον 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. +9:7 e3id rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπισκιάζουσα 1 Here Mark could be implying that: (1) the cloud enveloped or surrounded them. Alternate translation: “enveloping” or “surrounding” (2) the cloud cast a shadow on them. Alternate translation: “casting a shadow on” +9:7 jukl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the three disciples, Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “them all” (2) just Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Moses, and Elijah” +9:7 x4mv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐγένετο φωνὴ 1 Mark is using **voice** to represent the person who is speaking, which is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person was speaking” or “God the Father spoke” +9:7 ybu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. +9:7 ql9p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my Son, whom I love” +9:7 o80a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀκούετε 1 Because the voice is speaking to the three disciples, the command **Listen** is plural. +9:8 c4dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐξάπινα περιβλεψάμενοι, οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον 1 Here, the word **suddenly** could go with: (1) **saw**. Alternate translation: “having looked around, suddenly they no longer saw anyone” (2) **having looked around**. Alternate translation: “having suddenly looked around, they no longer saw anyone” +9:8 hq73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν 1 If it would in appear your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only saw Jesus with them any longer” 9:9 q2qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν 1 The first occurrence of the word **they** in this verse refers to Jesus and Peter and James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Peter, James and John” -9:9 pdmm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them” +9:9 wter rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go καταβαινόντων 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “going down” +9:9 pdmm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται, εἰ μὴ ὅταν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Relate to no one what you have seen, until the Son of Man has risen from the dead’” 9:9 w1nf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται 1 Here, the pronoun **them** and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **they** all refer to Peter, James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen” -9:9 wter διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται 1 Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them not tell anyone about what they had just seen” -9:9 t07p ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md). -9:9 zttm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can clarify that Jesus is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “he, the Son of Man” -9:9 w98g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ 1 Jesus speaks in this way of coming back to life, since it involves rising out of the grave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “would come back to life” -9:10 edv3 καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς 1 Here, Mark is using the term **word** in a specific sense, to mean “matter” or “event.” Alternate translation: “And they kept the matter to themselves” -9:10 to7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Mark is describing something Jesus would say by association with the words that came from his mouth when he taught them this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what he said” +9:9 zttm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Here Jesus is referring to himself as **the Son of Man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he, who was the Son of Man,” +9:9 w98g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ 1 Here, the phrase **risen from the dead** refers to people who had died then coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “had been restored to life” or “had resurrected” +9:9 t07p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses”\n +9:10 gxwy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς, συνζητοῦντες 1 Here Mark could mean that: (1) the disciples **kept the word to themselves**, which means they kept it secret (see the following note). Further, they were **discussing together** what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “they kept the word to themselves, and they were discussing together” (2) the disciples **kept the word**, which means that they did what Jesus said. Further, they were **discussing** among **themselves** what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “they kept the word, discussing among themselves” or “they obeyed what Jesus said, discussing with each other” (3) the disciples **kept the word**, which means that they focused on it. Further, they were **discussing** among **themselves** what **the word** meant. Alternate translation: “they seized on the word, discussing among themselves” +9:10 edv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς 1 When people have **kept** something **to themselves**, it means that they have not talked about it with anyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they kept the word secret” or “they did not speak to anyone else about the word” +9:10 to7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **word** represents an event that could be narrated using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the event” or “the things that they had seen” +9:10 o87r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations συνζητοῦντες τί ἐστιν τὸ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “discussing together, ‘What is it “to rise from the dead”?’” +9:10 z9rq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί ἐστιν τὸ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι 1 Here Mark implies that the disciples are **discussing together** what Jesus said about rising from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what Jesus meant when he said, ‘rise from the dead’” 9:10 wfu9 ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι 1 See how you translated the phrase “risen from the dead” in [9:9](../09/09.md). -9:11 s9zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning Jesus, saying” -9:11 je29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν 1 Here, the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were questioning Jesus” -9:12 o8hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔφη 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying” -9:12 s3q3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ? 1 Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the **Son of Man** must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised.” -9:12 xazj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξουδενηθῇ 1 Here, it is implied that those who would despise the **Son of Man** would be people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “would be despised by people” -9:12 toik rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning behind the phrase **been written** with an active form, as modeled by the UST. -9:12 i3j7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξουδενηθῇ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could state the phrase **would be despised** in active form. Alternate translation: “that people would hate him” -9:13 k3kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐποίησαν αὐτῷ ὅσα ἤθελον 1 If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating explicitly what the Jewish people did to Elijah. Alternate translation: “our leaders treated him very badly, just as they wanted to” -9:14 n8fd ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 Alternate translation: “when Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the other disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain” -9:14 qsp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς & αὐτούς 1 Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John. -9:15 qhc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν & προστρέχοντες & αὐτόν 1 All three occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. -9:16 w679 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς 1 Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked his disciples” (2) the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the people in the crowd” (3) the scribes. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the scribes” -9:17 a2j6 Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md). -9:17 eluu πνεῦμα 1 See how you translated the word **spirit** in [Mark 1:23](../mrk/01/23.md). -9:18 h98h ξηραίνεται 1 Alternate translation: “his body becomes rigid” -9:18 zre6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἴσχυσαν 1 The phrase **they were not strong enough** refers to the disciples not being able to drive the spirit out of the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could not drive it out of him” -9:19 tb67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει 1 Here, the pronoun **them** is plural, so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly to whom **them** refers. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here,**them** probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “But answering all of them, Jesus said” or “Addressing them all, Jesus said” or “Addressing everyone present, Jesus said” -9:19 azc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **generation**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **generation** in another way, as modeled by the UST. -9:19 nbw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος 1 Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean all the people who were alive at that time in history, and specifically, to refer to all the people who were present with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. -9:19 c88a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 Here, Jesus uses two rhetorical questions, **until when will I be with you** and **Until when will I bear with you**, to show his frustration and disappointment with their unbelief. If you do not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “O unbelieving generation. You test my patience” or “O unbelieving generation. Your unbelief tires me! I wonder how long I must bear with you!” or “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you much longer!” -9:19 n4dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 The question **until when will I be with you** and the question **Until when will I bear with you** have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “how long must I be with you and endure your unbelief” -9:19 b7u5 ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “Until when should I endure you” or “Until when must I put up with you” or “How long must I endure you” -9:19 nrya rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular φέρετε αὐτὸν πρός με 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the word **Bring** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. -9:20 bw3l πνεῦμα 1 See how you translated the word **spirit** in [Mark 1:23](../mrk/01/23.md). -9:20 l4r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν 1 In this verse the first and fourth occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the man’s “son”, who was possessed by a mute **spirit** and was mentioned in [Mark 9:17](../mrk/09/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions” -9:20 vdj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν 1 In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions” -9:21 f5zm καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν 1 Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the boy’s father, ‘How long of a time has this been happening to him?’ And the father said, ‘This has been happening to him since childhood’” -9:22 f5yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 In the sentence **help us, having compassion on us**, Mark records the father using a figure of speech in which the logical flow of events is altered in order to put what is most important in the mind of the speaker first (here the speaker is the father). The normal way of saying this would be, “having compassion on us, help us”, because it shows the natural order of events, since **having compassion** on someone normally precedes helping them. Mark records the father saying **help us** first because receiving help was what was most important to the father. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “have compassion on us and help us” -9:22 fbup rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **compassion** in another way, such as by using the verb “pity,” as modeled by the UST. -9:23 vh6c εἰ δύνῃ 1 The phrase **If you are able** is Jesus repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be more helpful in your language, you could express this as a statement or in some other way that is natural. Alternate translation: “You should not say to me, ‘If you are able’” or “You ask me if I am able. Of course I am able” or “Why do you say, ‘If you are able’” -9:23 kp1x πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 Alternate translation: “Everything is possible for the person who believes” or “Anything is possible for the person believing in God” -9:23 e5kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 The word **believing** refers to belief in God, and here it specifically refers to belief in Jesus and his power. The phrase **the one** means “any person” or “any one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “for anyone who believes that God is able to do them” or “for any person who believes in God’s power” or “for anyone one who believes in me” -9:24 h4y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 The sentence **Help my unbelief** does not mean that the man had no belief in Jesus or his power, but rather, these words express that the man realized he did not believe fully or believe to the extent that he should. The man is asking Jesus to help him overcome his unbelief and increase his faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Help me to have more faith” -9:24 wssi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unbelief**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **unbelief** in another way, as modeled by the UST. -9:25 qaw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος 1 The phrase **the crowd is running to {them}** means that more people were **running** toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them” -9:25 b54j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in this way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people was running to them” or “many people were running to them” -9:25 ul8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα 1 The words **mute** and **deaf** can be explained if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “You unclean spirit who are causing this boy to be unable to speak and unable to hear” -9:25 zd5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ 1 Your language may say “go out” rather than **come out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “go out from him” -9:26 adb6 κράξας 1 Alternate translation: “after the unclean spirit cried out” -9:26 i8dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 Your language may say “went out” rather than **came out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “it went out” or “the spirit went out of the boy” -9:26 n7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς 1 Mark is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the boy appeared dead” or “the boy looked like a dead person” -9:26 ns4t ὥστε τοὺς πολλοὺς λέγειν 1 Alternate translation: “so that many people said” -9:28 f0x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον 1 Your language may say “come” rather than **gone** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when he had come into a house” -9:28 zwjp εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον 1 Alternate translation: “when he had entered into a house” -9:28 sd45 κατ’ ἰδίαν 1 Alternate translation: “by himself” -9:29 pdk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives τοῦτο τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ 1 The words **nothing** and **except** are both negative words. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This kind can be cast out only by prayer and fasting” -9:29 v2s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο τὸ γένος 1 Here, the phrase **This kind** refers to a kind of unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This kind of unclean spirit” -9:29 kh4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go τοῦτο τὸ γένος & δύναται ἐξελθεῖν 1 Your language may say “go out” rather than **come out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “This kind is able to go out” -9:29 yrzf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns προσευχῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **prayer** by using a verb form, as modeled by the UST. -9:29 l6ok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns νηστείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fasting**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **fasting** in another way, as modeled by the UST. -9:31 f4gm ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md). -9:31 vpj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν, καὶ ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται 1 By calling himself **The Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. -9:31 w75k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **is being handed over** with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Evil men will hand over the Son of Man” -9:31 y5cw ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 Alternate translation: “The Son of Man is being betrayed” -9:31 z8ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, **hands** means control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “into the control of men” or “into the custody of men” -9:31 s1n2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **having been killed** with an active form and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “once they kill him, he will rise again after three days” -9:33 xv94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Capernaum” -9:33 l2kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ γενόμενος 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone into the house” +9:11 s9zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτων 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning” +9:11 je29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they asked” +9:11 s1cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἠλείαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν 1 Here the disciples are referring to a prophecy in [Malachi 4:5–6](../mal/04/05.md). This prophecy states that God will send **Elijah** before the day of the Lord arrives, and he will prepare people. Elijah was a prophet who did many powerful things a long time before Malachi wrote down this prophecy. The **scribes** teach that this means that **Elijah** must come before the Messiah does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for Elijah, who was a prophet long ago, to come” or “the Scriptures indicate that it is necessary for Elijah the prophet to come” +9:11 t8hh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐλθεῖν 1 Here, the word **come** refers to Elijah appearing in the world and doing what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to appear” or “to do what he is predicted to do” +9:11 fly4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρῶτον 1 Here the disciples imply that Elijah comes **first** because he comes before the Messiah does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “first, before the Messiah comes” +9:12 p09o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” +9:12 o8hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense Ἠλείας μὲν ἐλθὼν πρῶτον ἀποκατιστάνει πάντα 1 Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe something that is generally true. He does not necessarily mean that **Elijah** is currently doing these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form is natural for stating a general truth. Alternate translation: “Elijah, having come first, will restore all things” +9:12 pjbg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλθὼν πρῶτον 1 See how you translated “come first” in [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “having appeared first, before the Messiah does” +9:12 qno2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces something further that Jesus wants the disciples to think about. What he asks about at first appears to contrast with what he has said about Elijah. However, in the following verse Jesus will show how these things actually go together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further, potentially contrasting idea. Alternate translation: “Beyond that, though,” or “And yet,” +9:12 s3q3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ? 1 Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the **Son of Man** must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised.” +9:12 toik rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through prophets. Alternate translation: “did the prophets say” or “did God have the prophets write” +9:12 ldt3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα & πάθῃ 1 Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, who am the Son of Man, that I would suffer” +9:12 i3j7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξουδενηθῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that many would despise him” or “that they would despise him” +9:13 myp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces more information about Elijah that contrasts with what Jesus said in the previous verse about Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “And yet” or “Now” +9:13 gu1v λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” +9:13 yvjt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the three disciples, the word **you** here is plural. +9:13 k6b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλήλυθεν 1 See how you translated **come** in [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “has appeared” or “has done what he was predicted to do” +9:13 yixs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐποίησαν & ἤθελον 1 The pronouns **they** and **they** could refer to: (1) people in general who mistreated Elijah. Alternate translation: “certain ones did … they were wanting” (2) the Jewish religious leaders. Alternate translation: “the religious leaders did … they were wanting” +9:13 k3kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσα ἤθελον 1 Here Jesus implies that **whatever they wanted** was to mistreat and harm this **Elijah**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whatever harmful things they were wanting to do” or “any evil things they were wanting to do” +9:13 st2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through prophets. Alternate translation: “the prophets said” or “God had the prophets write” +9:14 lsk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” +9:14 n8fd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the rest of **the disciples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the rest of the disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain” +9:14 dgk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone” +9:14 qsp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς & αὐτούς 1 Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John. +9:15 k82v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐξεθαμβήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd saw him, which amazed them” +9:15 qhc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν & προστρέχοντες & αὐτόν 1 All three occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus … running to him … him” +9:16 ju59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτούς, τί συνζητεῖτε πρὸς αὑτούς 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “them what they were arguing with them about.” +9:16 w679 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτούς & πρὸς αὑτούς 1 Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun **them** refers to the scribes. Alternate translation: “his disciples … with the scribes” (2) the scribes. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “the scribes … with my disciples” (3) the people in the crowd. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd … with my disciples” +9:16 mk3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular συνζητεῖτε πρὸς αὑτούς 1 Because Jesus is speaking to a group of people (see the previous note), the word **you** here is plural. +9:17 a2j6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤνεγκα τὸν υἱόν μου πρὸς σέ, ἔχοντα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον 1 Here the man implies that he **brought** his **son** so that Jesus would cast out the demon and heal his son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I brought my son to you, having a mute spirit, so that you could cast the spirit out” +9:17 eluu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔχοντα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον 1 Here the man mean that his son was possessed or controlled by a **mute spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being possessed by a mute spirit” or “because a mute spirit possesses him” +9:17 eb86 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πνεῦμα ἄλαλον 1 Here the man implies that the **spirit** makes his son **mute**, that is, unable to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a spirit that makes him mute” +9:18 n09m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ 1 Here, the phrase **seize him** refers to when the demon forces a person to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might begin to control him” or “it might force him to do something” +9:18 s5gw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀφρίζει 1 When people are having convulsions, they can have trouble breathing or swallowing. This causes white foam to form around their mouths. If your readers would not be familiar with this symptom, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “foam comes out of his mouth” or “he cannot swallow properly” +9:18 h98h ξηραίνεται 1 Alternate translation: “his body stiffens up” or “he cannot move” +9:18 iu9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπα τοῖς μαθηταῖς σου, ἵνα αὐτὸ ἐκβάλωσιν, καὶ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “I asked your disciples, ‘Please cast it out,’ and” +9:18 x7vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 6 Here, the word **and** introduces what the disciples were not able to do in contrast to what the man wanted them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but” +9:18 zre6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἴσχυσαν 1 The man is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they were not able to cast it out” +9:19 pc2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” +9:19 tb67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** is plural, so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly to whom **them** refers. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here, **them** probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “answering all of them” or “addressing them all” or “addressing everyone present” +9:19 feix rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 Jesus is speaking to something that he knows cannot hear him. He is addressing the entire **generation** of people who were living at that time, and they are not all present to hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about this **generation**. He is actually speaking to the people who were there and who could hear him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to the people who were there, since they are included in the generation that Jesus is addressing. Alternate translation: “You who are part of this unbelieving generation, until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you?” +9:19 nbw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος 1 Here, **generation** represents the people who are part of the **generation**, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “O today’s people who are unbelieving” or “O unbelieving people of this generation” +9:19 c88a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were there and to show how frustrated he is by them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “I do not want to be with you for long. I do not want to bear with you for long.” or “I want to leave you! I want to stop bearing with you!” +9:19 azc9 ἕως πότε -1 Alternate translation: “how long … How long” +9:19 n4dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 The question **until when will I be with you** and the question **Until when will I bear with you** have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “until when will I be with you and endure your unbelief” +9:19 nfqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμᾶς & ὑμῶν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the people who are part of the **generation**, the words **you** and **you** here are plural. +9:19 b7u5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase bear with refers to being charitable or kind to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “will I be charitable to you” or “will I act kindly with you” +9:19 a61k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular φέρετε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to some people who were there, the command **Bring** is plural. +9:19 nrya rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to the man’s son. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to him more directly. Alternate translation: “the the man’s son” or “the one who has the mute spirit” +9:20 l4r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν & καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν 1 In this verse the first and fourth occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the man’s “son”, who was possessed by a mute **spirit** and was mentioned in [Mark 9:17](../mrk/09/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions” +9:20 vdj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν & καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν 1 In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions” +9:20 bw3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν 1 Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “caused him to have a seizure” +9:20 ssax rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀφρίζων 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:18](../09/18.md). Alternate translation: “foam coming out of his mouth” or “not being able to swallow properly” +9:21 f5zm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “he asked his father how much time it was while this had been happening to him. And he said that it was from childhood.” +9:21 bu6m πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ 1 Alternate translation: “For how much time has this been happening to him” or “This has been happening to him for how long of a time” +9:21 n215 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐκ παιδιόθεν 1 The father is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “This has been happening to him from childhood” +9:21 x33v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ παιδιόθεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **childhood**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Since he was very young” +9:22 kqal rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **but** introduces what the man wants Jesus to do in contrast with what his son is experiencing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **but** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and so” +9:22 f5yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since Jesus would have **compassion** on them before he would **help** them. Alternate translation: “having compassion on us, help us” +9:22 vwcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative βοήθησον ἡμῖν 1 This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you help us” +9:22 y1qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, the man means himself and his son but not Jesus, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +9:22 fbup rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sympathizing with” +9:23 hhgl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “In response,” +9:23 vh6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ δύνῃ 1 With the phrase **If you are able**, Jesus is repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Why did you say, ‘If you are able’” or “For what reason did you use the words, ‘If you are able’” +9:23 gc6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὸ εἰ δύνῃ? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the man. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have said, ‘If you are able.’” or “Do not say, ‘If you are able’!” +9:23 zt0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations τὸ εἰ δύνῃ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Did you speak about whether I was able” +9:23 kp1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 Here Jesus could be stating that **All things**: (1) can can be done for **the one believing**. Alternate translation: “All things can be done for the one believing” (2) can be done by **the one believing**. Alternate translation: “All things can be done by the one believing” +9:23 e5kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 Here Jesus could be implying that: (1) God can do anything for **the one believing** in him. Alternate translation: “are possible for God to do for the one believing in him” (2) Jesus can do anything for **the one believing** in him. Alternate translation: “are possible for me to do for the one believing in me” +9:24 nik2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πιστεύω 1 Here the man could be implying that he believes: (1) in God and that God will help him and his son. Alternate translation: “I believe in God” or “I believe that God will help us” (2) in Jesus and that Jesus will help him and his son. Alternate translation: “I believe in you” or “I believe that you will help us” +9:24 h4y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 Here the man implies that he wants Jesus to **Help** him overcome or remove his **unbelief**. In other words, while the man does believe, he also has **unbelief**, and he wants Jesus to help him get rid of that **unbelief**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Help me overcome the unbelief I still have” or “Assist me in removing my unbelief” or “Help me so that I always believe” +9:24 wssi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unbelief**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “me with how I do not believe” or “me whenever I fail to believe” +9:25 qaw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος 1 The phrase **a crowd is running to {them}** means that more people were **running** toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them” +9:25 b54j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγων αὐτῷ 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he told it” +9:25 ul8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα 1 Here the Jesus implies that **the spirit** makes the boy **mute and deaf**, that is, unable to speak or hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Spirit that makes the boy mute and deaf” +9:25 m3ca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ μηκέτι εἰσέλθῃς εἰς αὐτόν 1 Here Jesus is commanding the demon to stop possessing or controlling the boy and to never start possessing or controlling him again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “cease controlling him, and never start controlling him again” or “cease possessing him, and never possess him again” +9:25 zd5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔξελθε 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go out” +9:26 adb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλὰ σπαράξας, αὐτόν 1 Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:20](../09/20.md). Alternate translation: “having caused him to have a powerful seizure”\n +9:26 s78v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξῆλθεν 1 Here Mark means that the demon stopped possessing or controlling the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it no longer controlled him” or “it ceased possessing him” +9:26 i8dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “it went out” +9:26 n7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς 1 Mark is saying that the boy was like **a dead {person}** because he was lying so still and quietly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he became so quiet and still that he was like a dead person” or “he lay completely still on the ground, like a dead person” +9:26 ns4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς πολλοὺς 1 Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many of the people there” +9:26 hjf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγειν ὅτι ἀπέθανεν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “said that he had died” +9:28 zwjp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who went with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, going” +9:28 f0x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go εἰσελθόντος 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come” +9:28 sd45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations κατ’ ἰδίαν ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν, ὅτι ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκβαλεῖν αὐτό? 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked him privately why they were not able to cast it out.” +9:28 y9av rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 By **we**, the speaker means himself and the rest of the disciples but not Jesus, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +9:28 a1m9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτό 1 The pronoun **it** refers to the demon which Jesus cast out of the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the demon more directly. Alternate translation: “the demon” +9:29 v2s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο τὸ γένος 1 Here Jesus implies that he is speaking about a **kind** of demon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This kind of demon” +9:29 pdk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is able to come out only by prayer and fasting” +9:29 kh4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθεῖν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “to go out” +9:29 rdkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **prayer and fasting**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “prayer.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +9:30 kyue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out” +9:30 vrbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γνοῖ 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus did not want anyone to **know** that he was passing through Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “would know that he was there” +9:31 vpj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται & αὐτόν & ἀναστήσεται 1 Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am being handed over … me … I will rise up” +9:31 w75k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Someone is handing the Son of Man over” +9:31 z8ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας 1 The term **hands** represents power and control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the power” or “into the control”\n +9:31 y5cw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the word **men** refers to people who have authority and who want to get rid of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of powerful people” or “of people who hate him” +9:31 s1n2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκτανθεὶς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after they have killed him” +9:31 op9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστήσεται 1 Here, the phrase **rise up** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be restored to life” or “he will resurrect” +9:31 whyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **after three days** refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. See how you expressed this phrase in [8:31](../08/31.md). Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from then” +9:32 kmc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ῥῆμα 1 Here, **word** represents what Jesus said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he had just said” or “that teaching” +9:33 xv94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went” +9:33 l2kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 Here Mark is referring to **the house** where Jesus and his disciples were staying in Capernaum. It may have been Peter’s house (see [1:29](../01/29.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into the house in which they were goin to live” +9:33 irb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτούς, τί ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ διελογίζεσθε 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “them what they had been discussing on the way.” +9:33 ew7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular διελογίζεσθε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word **you** here is plural. +9:34 rlot rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οἱ & ἐσιώπων, πρὸς ἀλλήλους γὰρ διελέχθησαν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, τίς μείζων 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “they had been arguing with one another on the way about who was greatest, so they were silent” 9:34 gdg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τίς μείζων 1 Here, **greatest** refers to who was the **greatest** among the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them” -9:35 z754 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). -9:35 fkf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act as if he is the least important, and he must serve everyone” -9:35 jzl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 Being **first** refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If it would help your readers to understand what it means to be **first** and **last** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternately, you could express the meaning using plain language, as modeled by the UST. -9:35 ioiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important in God’s sight” -9:35 um58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal πρῶτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. -9:35 jqo3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” -9:35 z9x2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται & ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last” -9:35 t526 πάντων & πάντων 1 Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people” +9:35 nw8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθίσας 1 In Jesus’ culture, teachers usually sat down when they were going to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having sat down to instruct them” or “having sat down as a teacher does” +9:35 z754 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles” +9:35 jzl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 Being **first** refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be respected, he will be the least respected of all” or “If anyone wants to be significant, he will be the least significant of all” +9:35 um58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal πρῶτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “number one” +9:35 fkf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act like the last of all and a servant of all” +9:35 t526 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντων & πάντων 1 Jesus is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people” +9:36 l62w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations αὐτὸ -1 Here, the word translated **him** refers to the child without identifying whether the child was male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “this child … this child” 9:36 qqcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” -9:37 h242 ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων 1 Alternate translation: “a child such as this one” -9:37 ul12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person. Alternate translation: “on my behalf” -9:37 uik3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 The phrase **does not receive me but the one having sent me** means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him” -9:37 y24n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who has sent me” +9:37 uo2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς ἂν ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων δέξηται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐμὲ δέχεται 1 Here Jesus speaks as if people who receive **one of these little children** were actually receiving him. He means that these people, by receiving the **little children**, show that they would receive Jesus too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever receives one of these little children in my name, it is as if he or she received me” or “whoever receives one of these little children in my name proves that he or she would receive me” +9:37 h242 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων 1 Here Jesus is referring to **little children** like the little child whom he set in their midst (see [9:36](../09/36.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “any little child like the one standing here” or “any little child, like this one here,”\n +9:37 ul12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Here, the phrase **in my name** could mean that: (1) the person receives a little child because the person follows Jesus. Alternate translation: “because that person is acting as my disciple” (2) the person receives the little child because the little child follows Jesus. Alternate translation: “because the child is my disciple” +9:37 zs6o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς ἂν ἐμὲ δέχηται, οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 Here Jesus speaks as if people who receive him were actually receiving God, who sent him. He means that these people, by receiving him, show that they would receive God too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever receives me, it is as if he or she did not receive me but the one having sent me” or “the one receiving me proves that he or she would not only receive me but also the one having sent me” +9:37 uik3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 Jesus says **does not receive me** here as an overstatement for emphasis. He means that the people who receive him are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “receives not just me but also the one having sent me” or “does not receive me only but also the one having sent me” +9:37 y24n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 Here Jesus implies that **the one having sent** him is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God, the one who sent me” +9:38 a3d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive εἴδομέν & ἐκωλύομεν & ἡμῖν 1 When John says **we** and **us**, he is speaking of himself and the other disciples, so **we** and **us** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. 9:38 dxq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. The expression **in your name** means that the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority” -9:38 a3d3 Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md). -9:38 k2i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν 1 Here, **following** does not seem to mean “to be one of Jesus’ disciples”, since this man was acting in Jesus’ **name**. Here, **following with us** means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” or “he is not part of our group” +9:38 rmm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου & καὶ ἐκωλύομεν αὐτόν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **in your name, and we were preventing him**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “in your name who does not follow us, and we were preventing him.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +9:38 vpiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐκωλύομεν αὐτόν, ὅτι οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because he was not following with us, we were preventing him” +9:38 k2i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν 1 Here, **following** does not seem to mean “to be one of Jesus’ disciples”, since this man was claiming to act in Jesus’ **name**. Here, **following with us** means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was not traveling with us in our group” or “he was not part of our group” +9:39-40 xrm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν, μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν; οὐδεὶς γάρ ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί με & ὃς γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [9:39](../09/39.md) and [9:40](../09/40.md) into a verse bridge in order to include the reasons for Jesus’ command not to **prevent** the man before including the command. Alternate translation: “But Jesus said, ‘Whoever is not against us is for us. In fact, there is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me. Therefore, do not prevent him” +9:39 hbu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν; οὐδεὶς γάρ ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί με 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “There is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me, so do not prevent him” 9:39 oynl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **prevent**. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” -9:39 yw2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀνόματί 1 See how you translated **name** in [9:38](../09/38.md). -9:39 h7ez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κακολογῆσαί 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evil**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **evil** by using an adjective to describe it or by expressing it some other way that is natural in language. -9:40 tma4 οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “is not opposing us” -9:41 lz5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε 1 Jesus speaks about giving someone **a cup of water** as an example of how one person may help another, and the example could refer to any possible way that a person might help someone else. Here, giving one of the disciples a cup of water in Jesus’ name refers to helping them because they represent Jesus and are doing his work. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar expression from your language or say this using plain language. Alternate translation: “gives you a cup of water because you are working for me” or “helps you on my account” -9:41 m0d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀνόματι 1 See how you translated **name** in [9:37](../09/37.md). -9:41 u325 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν ὀνόματι 1 Here, the phrase **in the name** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “in my name” or “in the name of me, Jesus,” -9:41 bpz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε 1 Here, **in the name because** is an idiom which means to do something for the sake of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “because you belong to Christ” or “because you serve me” -9:41 bgq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ 1 Here, Jesus uses the negative phrase **certainly not** together with the negative word **lose**to express a strong positive meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he will certainly receive” -9:41 wnb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reward**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **reward** by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “he will certainly be rewarded” or “God will certainly reward that person” -9:41 jjq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Although the pronouns **he** and **his** are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose their reward” -9:42 cj0l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 The phrase **these little ones** could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically little compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (2) a reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these new believers” or (3) a reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these common people” -9:42 gef5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ 1 Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Here, Jesus is making a comparison to the punishment that people will receive from God for causing other people to sin. Jesus means that the person’s punishment from God for causing people to sin will be worse than if that person had drowned in the sea. He is not saying that someone would actually put a stone around a person’s neck and throw them into the sea as an alternative to being punished by God. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “The punishment he will receive will be worse than if” -9:42 z6k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μύλος ὀνικὸς 1 A **millstone of a donkey** was a round stone used for grinding grain into flour. It was so heavy that it required a donkey or an ox to turn it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of an object in your area that is very heavy, or you could use a general expression such as “a very heavy stone,” as modeled by the UST. -9:42 bx6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ 1 The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone of a donkey around his neck” -9:43 g8dv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου 1 Here, **hand** is a metonym for doing, or desiring to do, something sinful with your hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful with one of your hands” or “if you are doing something sinful with one of your hands” -9:43 ifcv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν 1 When Jesus says, **if your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off**, he is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the seriousness of sin and the importance of avoiding it. Jesus is not being literal when he says to cut off **your hand**, because Judaism taught against harming one’s body, and Jesus taught in [Mark 7:14–23](../mrk/07/14.md), and elsewhere that the human heart is what causes people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. -9:43 wd7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 Here, the phrase **enter into life** is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into eternal life” or “to die and live forever” -9:43 h9lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole κυλλὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal **life crippled**, he is not being literal, but rather, he is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. -9:43 l5bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **life** in another way. Alternate translation: “to live with God forever” or “live forever with God” -9:43 ttl7 εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον 1 Alternate translation: “where the fire cannot be put out” -9:45 lx2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε 1 Here, the word **foot** refers to going, or desiring to go someplace for the purpose of sinning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you use your foot to walk someplace in order to sin” -9:45 so26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 See how you translated the phrase **enter into life** in [Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md). -9:45 vj49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν 1 When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal **life lame**, he is not being literal, but rather is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical injuries or impairments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation. -9:45 hbt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase **to be thrown** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into Gehenna” -9:47 okc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν 1 Being the organ of vision, the **eye** substitutes for looking at something. In this case, the person looks at something which God has prohibited, which in turn can cause the person to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to sin because of looking at something, tear your eye out” or “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out” -9:47 h4dv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **enter into the kingdom of God** is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. This phrase has a similar meaning to the phrase “to enter into life” which was used in [Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md) and [Mark 9:45](../mrk/09/45.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s kingdom and live with him forever with only one eye” -9:47 t7uv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Jesus speaks of entering **into the kingdom of God with one eye** he is not being literal, but rather is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. -9:47 r2gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 See how you translated the phrase **to be thrown into Gehenna** in [Mark 9:45](../mrk/09/45.md). -9:49 mr5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶς & πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase **will be salted** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone with fire” -9:49 ma3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται 1 Here, **fire** is a metaphor for suffering, and putting salt on people is a metaphor for purifying them, so **will be salted with fire** is a metaphor for being purified through suffering. Alternate translation: “will be made pure in the fire of suffering” or “will suffer in order to be purified, as a sacrifice is purified with salt” +9:39 ouab rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular μὴ κωλύετε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the command **Do not prevent** is plural. +9:39 wyk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ποιήσει & δυνήσεται 1 Here Jesus uses the future tense to describe something that is generally true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form is natural for stating a general truth. Alternate translation: “does … is able” +9:39 yw2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 See how you translated **name** in [9:38](../09/38.md). Alternate translation: “on my behalf” or “as my representative” or “by my authority” +9:39 h7ez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κακολογῆσαί 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evil**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to say evil things about” +9:40 ozrh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason for what Jesus has just told his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a statement, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “Here is why:” +9:40 tma4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν 1 Here, the phrase **against us** describes people who attack or hate Jesus and his disciples. The phrase **for us** describes people who support or are friendly to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable phrases or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is not our enemy is our friend” or “is not attacking us is helping us”\n +9:40 hp68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν -1 By **us**, Jesus means himself and his disciples, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +9:41 gzql rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an example that explains what Jesus has just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “Here is what I mean:” +9:41 lz5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς & ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος 1 Jesus speaks about giving someone **a cup of water** to drink as an example of one small way in which a person can help another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is an example, or you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “whoever, for example, gives you a cup of water” or “whoever helps you in any way” +9:41 nmx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμᾶς & ἐστε & ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is talking to his disciples, the word **you** throughout this verse is plural. +9:41 m0d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι 1 Here, the phrase **in the name that** introduces the reason or basis for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground that” or “since” +9:41 ypgl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person Χριστοῦ ἐστε 1 Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first person form. Alternate translation: “you belong to me, Christ” +9:41 bpz5 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the truth and importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” +9:41 bgq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ 1 Jesus is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **certainly not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **lose**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “he will most certainly receive” +9:41 jjq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Although the pronouns **he** and **his** are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose his or her reward” +9:41 wnb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” +9:42 nhbw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces a situation that contrasts with the situation that Jesus described in the previous verse. In this verse, people are harming instead of helping Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “However,” +9:42 v8qw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμέ 1 Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes one of these little ones who believe in me to sin” +9:42 cj0l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμέ 1 The phrase **these little ones** could refer: (1) to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these unimportant people who believe in me” (2) to children who love Jesus and who are physically **little** compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (3) to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these people who recently believed in me” +9:42 gef5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ 1 Here Jesus implies that what he is about to describe is **better** than being punished by God for causing one of these little ones to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “rather than being punished by God for doing that, it is better for him if” +9:42 t9fo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & βέβληται 1 Although the terms **him**, **his**, and **he** are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “for that person … his or her … he or she has been thrown” +9:42 bami rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive περίκειται μύλος ὀνικὸς περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ, καὶ βέβληται εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that people might put a millstone of a donkey around his neck and throw him into the sea” +9:42 z6k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μύλος ὀνικὸς 1 A **millstone** was a round stone used for grinding grain into flour. The phrase **of a donkey** indicates that this kind of **millstone** was heavy enough that it took a **donkey** to turn it. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of stone, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a very large rock” or “a very heavy object” +9:42 bx6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περίκειται & περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ 1 The implication is that someone would tie the **millstone** around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is attached to his neck” +9:43 ifcv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου 1 Jesus is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that the disciples might experience their **hand** causing them **to stumble**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “consider this situation: your hand causes you to stumble. If that were to happen” +9:43 g8dv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου 1 Here, Jesus speaks of **your foot** as if they were a person who could cause **you to stumble**. He means that the **hand** is the part of the body that is involved in the stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is your hand’s fault that you stumble” or “you stumble with your hand” +9:43 m3k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd σκανδαλίσῃ σε & σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν & σε 1 Even though Jesus is speaking to many disciples, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** throughout this verse as well as the command **cut it off** are singular. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who is speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. If you do so, you may also need to make some other words plural. +9:43 gxu4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλίσῃ σε 1 Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to sin” +9:43 qo45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν 1 Here Jesus provides the most extreme response to sinning. He does not mean that this should be the normal way to deal with sin. You should preserve the extreme language Jesus uses, but you could use a form that indicates that this is the most extreme example. Alternate translation: “if necessary you should even cut it off!” +9:43 wd7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 Here Jesus speaks as if **life** were a house into which someone could **enter**. He is referring to experiencing or receiving **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience life” or “to receive life” +9:43 l5bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be able to live” +9:43 h9lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ζωὴν 1 Here Jesus implies that this **life** is everlasting or undying life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “true life” or “everlasting life” +9:43 wlu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν Γέενναν 1 Here Jesus uses the name **Gehenna** to refer to hell. The valley named **Gehenna** was outside the city of Jerusalem and was a place where people threw out and burned garbage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley” +9:43 ttl7 εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον 1 Here, the phrase **the unquenchable fire** refers to **Gehenna**, or hell, and describes it as a very unpleasant place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which is as hot as unquenchable fire” or “a terrible place” +9:44 f0g0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται 1 See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it. +9:44 yh4o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται 1 Here the author describes hell as if it were a place where there were worms and fire. He means that it is a very unpleasant place where people experience punishment and pain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “where it is as if their worm does not end, and it is as if the fire is not quenched” or “which is like a place where their worm does not end and the fire is not quenched” +9:44 vpk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **their** refers to people who are in Gehenna. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the worm of the people there” +9:44 urrn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν 1 Here, the author is using the possessive form to describe a **worm** that devours them. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worm that devours them” +9:44 kj46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὁ σκώληξ & οὐ τελευτᾷ 1 If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people were being devoured by only one **worm**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “worms do not end” +9:44 m6z2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism οὐ τελευτᾷ 1 The author is referring to death in a polite way by using the word **end**. He means that **the worm** continues to devour the people there because it never dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “does not pass away” or “does not die” or “never ceases to devour” +9:44 lm09 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people do not quench the fire” +9:44 s37j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πῦρ 1 Here the author implies that **the fire** burns the people who are in Gehenna. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the fire that burns them” +9:45 lx2b ἐὰν ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἀπόκοψον αὐτόν; καλόν ἐστίν σε εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν, ἢ τοὺς δύο πόδας ἔχοντα 1 Here Jesus repeats what he said in [9:43](../09/43.md) except he refers to a **foot** and being **lame** rather than a “hand” and being “crippled.” Express the idea as you did there, making the necessary changes to refer to a **foot**. +9:45 vj49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you” +9:45 hbt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν Γέενναν 1 See how you translated **Gehenna** in [9:43](../09/43.md). Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley” +9:45 zhf0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τὴν Γέενναν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **Gehenna**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the words “into the unquenchable fire” after **Gehenna**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +9:46 c8fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται 1 See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. Since this verse is identical to [9:44](../09/44.md), those who decide to include it should express the idea as they did there. +9:47 p0ot rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε 1 Jesus is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that the disciples might experience their **eye** causing them to stumble. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “consider this situation: your eye causes you to stumble. If that were to happen” +9:47 okc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε 1 Here, Jesus speaks of **your eye** as if it were a person who could cause **you to stumble**. He means that the **eye** is the part of the body that is involved in the stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is your eye’s fault that you stumble” or “you stumble with your eye”\n +9:47 lcbs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν & σέ 1 Even though Jesus is speaking to many disciples, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** throughout this verse as well as the command **throw it out** are singular. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who is speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. If you do so, you may also need to make some other words plural. +9:47 j65u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλίζῃ σε 1 Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to sin” +9:47 t7uv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔκβαλε αὐτόν 1 Here Jesus provides the most extreme response to sinning. He does not mean that this should be the normal way to deal with sin. You should preserve the extreme language Jesus uses, but you could use a form that indicates that this is the most extreme example. Alternate translation: “if necessary you should even throw it out!” +9:47 qy91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you” +9:47 r2gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν Γέενναν 1 See how you translated **Gehenna** in [9:43](../09/43.md). Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley” +9:48 sss2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ, καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται 1 Here Jesus describes hell as if it were a place where there were worms and fire. He means that it is a very unpleasant place where people experience punishment and pain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “where it is as if their worm does not end, and it is as if the fire is not quenched” or “which is like a place where their worm does not end and the fire is not quenched” +9:48 sss3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **their** refers to people who are in Gehenna. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the worm of the people there” +9:48 sss4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **worm** that devours them. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worm that devours them” +9:48 sss5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὁ σκώληξ & οὐ τελευτᾷ 1 If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people were being devoured by only one **worm**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “worms do not end” +9:48 sss6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism οὐ τελευτᾷ 1 Jesus is referring to death in a polite way by using the word **end**. He means that **the worm** continues to devour the people there because it never dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “does not pass away” or “does not die” or “never ceases to devour” +9:48 sss7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people do not quench the fire” +9:48 sss8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πῦρ 1 Here Jesus implies that **the fire** burns the people who are in Gehenna. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the fire that burns them” +9:49 k379 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation related to what Jesus has just said about using extreme means to make sure that one does not sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As a matter of fact,” +9:49 mr5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶς & ἁλισθήσεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone” +9:49 ma3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται 1 Here Jesus speaks as if people were food or sacrifices that **will be salted with fire**. In Jesus’ culture, people would put salt on their food and on sacrifices that they offered to God. The salt preserved the food and made it taste better. When someone is salted **with fire**, it most likely refers to that person experiencing difficult or painful situations that eventually help and sanctify that person. However, Jesus does not explain the metaphor, and Christians disagree on what it means. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. If necessary, you could state more explicitly that Jesus is referring to some form of suffering and its effects on people. Alternate translation: “will experience something like being salted with fire” or “will suffer as if they were being burned, and that will help them as if they were being salted” +9:49 mlnp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants πυρὶ 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **with fire**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and every sacrifice will be salted with salt” after **with fire**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +9:50 qt9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables καλὸν τὸ ἅλας 1 To teach the disciples, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: Salt is good” +9:50 oaep rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν & τὸ ἅλας ἄναλον γένηται, ἐν τίνι 1 Jesus means that it is possible for **salt** to become **unsalty**, and he is speaking about what can or cannot happen after **salt** has become **unsalty**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “suppose that the salt becomes unsalty. With what” 9:50 rb7r ἄναλον γένηται 1 Alternate translation: “loses its salty taste” -9:50 fqb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε? 1 By using the question **with what will you season it?**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form to emphasize a truth that he wants his listeners to understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again.” +9:50 fqb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε? 1 Jesus is using the question form to show that no one can make ruined salt salty again. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you cannot season it with anything!” or “you are not able to season it.”\n 9:50 t76n αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε 1 Alternate translation: “will you make it taste salty again” -9:50 f34y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were **salt**. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what **salt** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food” -9:50 syc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 The plural reflexive pronoun **yourselves** is used here to emphasize that Jesus wanted his 12 disciples to apply what he was saying to themselves. Use a form that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “Make sure that each of you has salt within yourself” -9:50 tind rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις 1 The command, **be at peace with one another**, is an instruction to all of Jesus’ 12 disciples. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. -10:intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in [Mark10:7–8](../mrk/10/07.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Jesus’ teaching about divorce\n\nThe Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. As Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage, he shows that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nMetaphors are mental pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” ([Mark 10:43](../mrk/10/43.md)). -10:1 qq93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς, ἔρχεται 1 Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him, and they were leaving Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “getting up, Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum and went from that place” -10:1 goki rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 Your language may say “comes” rather than **goes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he comes” -10:1 j5wa καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 Alternate translation: “and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River” or “and to the area east of the Jordan River” -10:1 s6fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go συνπορεύονται & ὄχλοι πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “the crowds went together to him” -10:1 vzb4 εἰώθει 1 Alternate translation: “was his custom” or “he usually did” -10:5 m73x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** refers to a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as modeled by the UST. -10:5 xqzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν 1 The phrase **hardness of heart** is an idiom which describes stubbornly choosing to resist God’s will and desires and instead choosing one’s own will and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase “the hardness of their heart” in [Mark 3:5](../mrk/03/05.md). Alternate translation: “your stubbornness” -10:6 m6lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς 1 Here, the adjectives **male** and **female** are being used as nouns in order to describe two groups of people, men and women. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these in another way. Alternate translation: “God made people to be men and women” -10:6 jz57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς 1 Beginning in the previous verse, Jesus begins directly addressing the Pharisees with the words “Because of your hardness of heart.” Here and in the next two verses, he continues to address the Pharisees. In this verse, Jesus begins quoting two Old Testament scripture passages, [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md) and [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md) which he concludes at the end of [Mark 10:8](../mrk/10/08.md). Jesus’ entire address is enclosed with double quotation marks. His quotation of the Old Testament is enclosed with single quotation marks, because it is a quote within a quote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But from the beginning of creation, the Scriptures tell us that God made people male and female” -10:7 lfzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 Here, the word **man** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men will leave their fathers and mothers” or “men will leave their parents” -10:8 rd63 καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν; ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ 1 In this verse Jesus finishes his quotation of [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md) and [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md). Jesus began quoting Genesis in the second half of [Mark 10:6](../mrk/10/06.md). -10:8 p7yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ 1 A husband and wife **no longer** being **two** but instead being **one flesh** is metaphor illustrating the husband and wife’s close union as a couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or clarify this using plain language. Alternate translation: “the two people are like one person” -10:9 ty4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ οὖν ὁ Θεὸς συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω 1 The phrase **what God joined together** refers to any married couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Therefore, since God has joined together husband and wife, let no one separate them” or “Therefore, since God has joined together husband and wife, let no one tear them apart” -10:9 pty4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω 1 Here, although the term **man** is masculine, it is used in a generic sense to refer to any person, male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “should not be separated by any person” or “let people not separate” -10:10 l8fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ τούτου ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν 1 The word **this** refers to the conversation that Jesus just had with the Pharisees about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “asked Jesus about the conversation he had just had with the Pharisees” -10:11 i5kp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὃς ἂν 1 Here the word **Whoever** does not refer to anyone in the world, but rather to any person who **divorces his wife and marries another** person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who” -10:12 sn1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μοιχᾶται 1 Here, the phrase **she commits adultery** means that a woman who divorces her husband and marries another man commits adultery against her previous husband. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she commits adultery against the first man she married” -10:13 zx1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And it happened that” or “After this” -10:13 nmw7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσέφερον 1 Here, **they** refers to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. -10:13 pk8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτῶν ἅψηται 1 Here, **he might touch them** means that Jesus would lay his hands on the children and bless them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might touch them with his hands and bless them” or “Jesus might lay his hands on them and bless them” -10:14 yi5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά 1 The phrase **Permit the little children to come to me** and the phrase **do not forbid them** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be sure to allow the little children to come to me” -10:14 qj7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ κωλύετε 1 If the double negative **do not forbid** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “allow” -10:15 y3a2 ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν 1 Alternate translation: “if anyone will not receive the kingdom of God as a little child, that person will definitely not enter it” -10:15 a1e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς παιδίον 1 The point of the comparison, **as a little child**, is that Jesus is comparing how a person must receive the kingdom of God with how a little child would receive things. If it would help in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with humble faith” -10:15 q3ck rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν 1 Here, the word **it** refers to the kingdom of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not enter the kingdom of God” -10:16 jq4f ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὰ 1 Alternate translation: “embracing the children in his arms” -10:17 fpp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω 1 Here, the word **inherit** means “be given” or “receive” and is being used to mean “receive eternal life” or “be given eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to receive eternal life” or “in order to obtain eternal life” -10:17 d0iy Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md). -10:17 h45i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ζωὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind **life** by using a verbal form like “live,” as modeled by the UST. -10:18 lw1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? 1 Jesus’ statement “Why are you calling me good?” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using in order to make a point and not to obtain information. If you would not use a rhetorical question to make a point in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good!” -10:18 gyod rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one is good except one—God**, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and about what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher,” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life,” a person simply needs to know the right things and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God, a person must focus on God and put their trust in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. -10:19 qs3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 In the previous verse Jesus begins directly addressing the man who came to him. This verse continues Jesus’ direct speech to the man. However, in this verse, beginning with the phrase **Do not kill**, Jesus begins quoting several Old Testament passages. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation of the Old Testament as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “You know that the Scriptures tell us that we should not kill, commit adultery, steal, testify falsely, or defraud others, and that each person must honor their father and mother” -10:19 hj3v μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς 1 Alternate translation: “do not testify falsely against anyone” or “do not lie about someone in court” -10:20 bd3s Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md). -10:21 syq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ 1 Here, **lack** is a metaphor for still needing to do something. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what it means to **lack** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” -10:21 rd85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Here Jesus implies that the man should **give** the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. -10:21 ux1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the phrase **the poor** with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” -10:21 iij4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕξεις θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 Jesus speaks of rewards in heaven as if these rewards are **treasure**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you will be rewarded in heaven” -10:22 afu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῷ λόγῳ 1 Although the term **word** is singular, Mark is using this term to refer to all of the instructions that Jesus gave the man in the prior verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language, as modeled by the UST. -10:22 v58f ἔχων κτήματα πολλά 1 Alternate translation: “someone who owned many things” -10:24 z9z1 ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “but Jesus said to his disciples again” -10:24 fh1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνα 1 Here Jesus is using the term **Children** to describe the disciples. They are under his spiritual care and Jesus teaches them as a father would instruct his children, and he regards them in that sense. If your readers would not understand the use of the term **Children** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could translate this plainly, as UST does. -10:25 f15k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 This entire verse is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize how difficult it is for a **rich** person **to enter into the kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses the difficulty of something happening. -10:25 t4y8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 This phrase **an eye of a needle** refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing **needle** through which the thread passes. If your readers are not familiar with camels and/or needles, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could state this in plain language without using hyperbole and express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “It is extremely difficult for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God” -10:27 vfyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, although the term **men** is masculine, it is used with a generic sense to refer to people in general, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. -10:28 hcv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 **Behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. -10:29 m1w3 ἢ ἀγροὺς 1 Alternate translation: “or the land that he owns” -10:30 sjhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ 1 The phrase **not receive** in this verse, when combined with the phrase “no one” in the previous verse, creates a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you can state the entire sentence positively. See the UST. -10:30 heb4 ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ 1 Alternate translation: “in this present age” -10:31 y2lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ & ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words **first** and **last** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be” -10:31 ym7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 Here, Jesus is using the words **first** and **last** metaphorically. See how you translated these words in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). -10:32 hq7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ & ἀκολουθοῦντες 1 Some people were walking **behind** Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” -10:32 k1nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). -10:33 pv4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 **Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” +9:50 gims rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀρτύσετε & ἔχετε & εἰρηνεύετε 1 Because Jesus is talking to his disciples, the word **you** and the commands **Have** and **be at peace** are plural. +9:50 f34y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 Here Jesus commands his disciples to have **salt** in themselves. Just as salt makes food better in many ways, so Jesus’ disciples can make the world better in many ways. If possible, preserve the figure of speech or use simile form since it refers back to the illustration Jesus just gave. Alternate translation: “Be like food that has salt in it” or “Help others as if you had salt in yourselves” +9:50 syc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρηνεύετε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “act peaceably” +10:intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Progress toward Jerusalem; Jesus repeatedly predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27–10:52)\n * Jesus teaches about marriage and divorce (10:1–12)\n * Jesus blesses little children (10:13–16)\n * Jesus talks with a rich man (10:17–22)\n * Jesus teaches about wealth, possessions, and the kingdom (10:23–31)\n * Jesus predicts his death and resurrection (10:32–34)\n * Jesus and the disciples speak about who will be great (10:35–45)\n * Jesus heals blind Bartimaeus (10:46–52)\n\nSome translations set quotations farther to the right than the rest of the text to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations in [10:6–8](../10/06.md), which are from [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md) and [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Divorce\n\nIn [10:2](../10/02.md), the Pharisees test Jesus by asking him about an issue that was controversial among Jewish religious leaders: divorce. More specifically, the religious leaders argued about whether men could divorce their wives and about what were valid grounds for divorce. So, they ask Jesus about this. When Jesus asks what Moses wrote in the Law, the Pharisees refer to [Deuteronomy 24:1–4](../deu/24/01.md), which assumes that men do divorce their wives. Jesus responds that this section of the Law exists only because the Israelites were stubborn. He means that God knew that the Israelite men would sometimes divorce their wives, so he included a law about how to do it. Then Jesus argues that divorce is never what God wants, and he quotes from Genesis 1 and 2 to prove this. He further says that any divorced person who marries again is involved in adultery. Make sure that it is clear that both Jesus and the Pharisees are making arguments based on the Scriptures.\n\n### Rich people and the kingdom of God\n\nIn Jesus’ culture, many people thought that rich people had been specifically blessed by God. When Jesus said that it was extremely difficult for rich people to enter God’s kingdom (see [10:23–25](../10/23.md)), the disciples were shocked. They thought that if it was hard for rich people to enter the kingdom, it would be impossible for everyone else. That is why they ask the question, “And who is able to be saved?” ([10:26](../10/26.md)). If your readers might not understand why the disciples respond in this way, you may need to include a footnote that explains some of this information.\n\n### Sitting at Jesus’ right and left hand\n\nIn [10:37](../10/37.md) and [10:40](../10/40.md), Jesus and James and John refer to sitting at Jesus’ right hand and at his left hand. They are referring to the places of honor at the right and left side of a king or ruler. The people who sit in these places have authority and are respected the most after the king or ruler. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation. See the notes on these two verses for translation options.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Drinking the cup\n\nIn [10:38–39](../10/38.md), Jesus refers to a “cup” from which he is going to drink. He is using a figure of speech from the Old Testament that refers to experiencing suffering and pain (for example, see [Psalm 75:8](../psa/75/08.md) and [Isaiah 51:17](../isa/51/17.md)). He means that he will experience suffering, and his disciples must be ready to experience it as well. Since this figure of speech is from the Old Testament, if possible you should preserve it or express the idea in simile form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Being baptized with a baptism\n\nIn [10:38–39](../10/38.md), Jesus refers to a “baptism” with which he and his disciples will be “baptized.” He means that, just as people who are baptized are covered with water, he and his disciples will be overwhelmed by suffering and difficult circumstances. Since baptism is an important concept in the Bible, if possible you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMost of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in conversations, and many of the conversations are with one person. Because of this, the majority of the forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. So, you should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 5, 19, and 35. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]]) +10:1 r6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,” +10:1 qq93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἔρχεται 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, goes” +10:1 goki rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “comes” instead of **goes**. Alternate translation: “he comes” +10:1 av2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν 1 Here, the phrase **that place** refers to Capernaum (see [9:33](../09/33.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from Capernaum” +10:1 j5wa πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 Here, the phrase **beyond the Jordan** refers to regions to the east of the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the areas on the east side of the Jordan River” +10:1 s6fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go συνπορεύονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go together” +10:1 vzb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰώθει 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was his custom” or “he generally did” +10:2 koh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτὸν, εἰ ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γυναῖκα ἀπολῦσαι? πειράζοντες αὐτόν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Is it lawful for a husband to divorce his wife?’ testing him” +10:2 ox9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal πειράζοντες αὐτόν 1 Here, the word **testing** introduces the purpose for which the Pharisees asked Jesus this question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “which they asked to test him” or “with the goal of testing him” +10:3 m4pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” +10:3 m7ya rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, τί ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Μωϋσῆς? 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked them what Moses commanded them.” +10:3 l74d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Jesus is referring to what the Law that God gave the Israelites through **Moses** includes about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What laws about divorce did God give you through Moses” or “What did Moses write for you in the Law about divorce” +10:3 j89n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the word **you** here is plural. +10:4 qyht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπέτρεψεν Μωϋσῆς βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι καὶ ἀπολῦσαι 1 Here the Pharisees are referring to a specific section in the law that God gave to Moses (see [Deuteronomy 24:1–4](../deu/24/01.md)). This passage discusses divorce and remarriage, and it mentions the use of **a certificate of divorce**. The Pharisees interpreted this passage to mean that men could divorce their wives, but they had to use **a certificate of divorce**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “In the Law, Moses permitted a husband to write a certificate of divorce and then to divorce his wife” +10:4 vpgb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι 1 Here the Pharisees imply that the husband must also give the **certificate of divorce** to his wife. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to write a certificate of divorce, to give it to her,” +10:4 qlql rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown βιβλίον ἀποστασίου 1 A **certificate of divorce** is a written document that makes the divorce official. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of document, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a paper that testifies to the divorce” +10:5 m73x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” +10:5 xqzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **your hardness of heart** refers to obstinacy or unwillingness to listen and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Because you are hardheaded” or “Because you are so stubborn”\n +10:5 slxl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hardness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because your hearts are hard” +10:5 y613 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the words **your** and **you** here are plural. +10:6-8 jz57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς & ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα & καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν; ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But from the beginning of creation, as the Scriptures say, God made them male and female. The Scriptures say further that, because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh. So then, I tell you that they are no longer two, but one flesh” +10:6 nk5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ & ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 Here, the phrase **from the beginning of creation** refers to when God created everything that exists. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the beginning of the world” or “at the time when God made the creation” +10:6 m6lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς 1 Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “in the words of the Scriptures, ‘He made them male and female’” or “as the Scriptures say, ‘He made them male and female’” +10:7-8 f8s2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα & καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν 1 Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Further, again in the words of the Scriptures, ‘Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh’” or “The Scriptures also say, ‘Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesha’” +10:7 sdzf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἕνεκεν τούτου 1 The pronoun this refers to what the previous verse includes about how God created people male and female (see [10:6](../10/06.md)). If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to those ideas more directly. Alternate translation: “Because God created people that way” +10:7 lfzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 The word **man** represents men in general in general, not one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “men will leave their fathers and mothers” or “men will leave their parents” +10:7 lnz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος 1 Here the author of the quotation implies that this happens when the **man** gets married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he gets married, a man will leave” +10:7 m39v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense καταλείψει 1 Here Jesus uses the future tense to speak about something that is generally true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is most naturally for expressing a general truth. Alternate translation: “leaves” +10:7 vdbn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words after **and mother**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and will be joined to his wife” after **and mother**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +10:8 rd63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks as if **the two** are **one flesh**. He means that a husband and wife are so closely joined that it is as if they had **one flesh** or one body between them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the two will be like one flesh” or “the two will be as closely united as possible” +10:8 zu9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ δύο 1 Jesus is using the number **two** as a noun to refer to a husband and a wife together. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this number with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the two of them” or “the two spouses” +10:8 zszz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion or inference based on the words Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “As you can see” +10:8 p7yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ 1 Here Jesus repeats in different form the words from the figure of speech at the end of the quotation earlier in this verse. He means that a husband and wife are so closely joined that it is as if they had **one flesh** or one body between them. Express the idea as you did earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “it is as if they are no longer two, but they are like one flesh” or “they are no longer two separate people, but are as closely united as possible” +10:9 o491 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference based on what Jesus has said about marriage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then” +10:9 ty4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ & ὁ Θεὸς συνέζευξεν 1 The phrase **what God joined together** refers to any married couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those whom God has joined together as husband and wife” or “couples whom God has joined together” +10:9 hshl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “man should not separate” +10:9 pty4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, although the term **man** is masculine, it is used in a generic sense to refer to any person, male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person” or “humans” +10:10 cn28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν πάλιν, οἱ μαθηταὶ περὶ τούτου ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν 1 Here, the word **again** could go with: (1) **in the house**. Alternate translation: “again in the house, the disciples were asking him about this” (2) **asked**. Alternate translation: “in the house, the disciples were asking him again about this” +10:10 a1fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 Here, the phrase **the house** refers to the place where Jesus and his disciples were staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the house in which they were living”\n +10:10 l8fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτου 1 The word **this** refers to the conversation that Jesus just had with the Pharisees about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the conversation he had just had with the Pharisees” +10:11 i5kp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄλλην 1 Jesus is using the adjective **another** as a noun to mean another woman. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “another person” +10:11 cosl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μοιχᾶται ἐπ’ αὐτήν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adultery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “becomes an adulterer against her” or “does what is adulterous against her” +10:12 mn0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὴ 1 The pronoun **she** refers to any married woman. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to married women more directly. Alternate translation: “a wife” +10:12 ghs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄλλον 1 Jesus is using the adjective **another** as a noun to mean another man. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “another person” +10:12 sn1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μοιχᾶται 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adultery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “she becomes an adulteress” or “she does what is adulterous” +10:13 zx1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And it happened that” or “After this,” +10:13 nmw7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns προσέφερον 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “other people were bringing” +10:13 pk8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction αὐτῶν ἅψηται 1 In Mark’s culture, when Jesus would**touch** the little children, that would express God’s love for them and convey God’s blessing to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what laying his hands on them means. Alternate translation: “he might stretch out his hands toward them” or “he might touch them to bless them” +10:13 jk69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the people who were bringing the little children. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who were bringing the little children” +10:14 mao6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the disciples were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” +10:14 q9c8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά; τῶν γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Of the ones such as these is the kingdom of God, so permit the little children to come to me, and do not forbid them” +10:14 yi5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses. Alternate translation: “Permit the little children to come to me; yes, do not forbid them” or “Permit the little children to come to me” +10:14 a4wj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἄφετε & μὴ κωλύετε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the commands **Permit** and **do not forbid** are plural. +10:14 qj7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεσθαι 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “to go” +10:14 zlqb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν & τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe people who belong in **the kingdom of God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God belongs to the ones such as these” or “the ones such as these belong in the kingdom of God” +10:14 jq4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῶν & τοιούτων 1 The pronoun **these** refers to the little children. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to the little children more directly. Alternate translation: “of the ones such as these little children” +10:14 gq3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile τῶν & τοιούτων 1 Jesus is referring to **the little children** and to people who are like them. He does not indicate exactly how these people are like **the little children**, so if possible express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “of people who are like these” +10:15 h2ir ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the truth and importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” +10:15 e08x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word **you** here is plural. +10:15 y3a2 ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in positive form. Alternate translation: “only whoever receives the kingdom of God as a little child will enter into it” +10:15 a1e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς παιδίον 1 Jesus is saying that his disciples should be like **a little child** because little children are humble and thankfully receive gifts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a little child receives things” or “with humility like that of a little child”\n +10:15 q3ck rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” +10:16 jq4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτά 1 In Mark’s culture, when Jesus placed his hands on the little children, that expressed God’s love for them and conveyed God’s blessing to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what having laid his hands on them means. See how you translated “touch them” in [10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “stretching out his hands toward them” or “which he did by placing his hands on them” +10:17 d0iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”\n +10:17 si2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche αὐτοῦ 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples,” +10:17 nffm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐκπορευομένου 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming out” +10:17 tayx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants προσδραμὼν εἷς καὶ γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν, ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν 1 Here Mark introduces a man as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a man ran up to him. He knelt before him and was asking him” +10:17 oh92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν 1 In this man’s culture, kneeling down before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what kneeling down means. Alternate translation: “having prostrated himself before him” or “having bowed down to him in respect” +10:17 fpp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω 1 Here the man speaks as if he were a child who would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that he wants to receive **eternal life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I might receive eternal life” or “I might be given eternal life”\n +10:17 h45i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I might be able to live eternally” +10:18 kjkd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” +10:18 uwro rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “No one is good except one—God. So, why are you calling me good?” +10:18 lw1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the man for calling another human **good** without thinking carefully about it. Jesus is not denying that he is **good**, but he wants the man to think about it more carefully. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are calling me good without thinking carefully.” or “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good!” +10:18 gyod rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Only one is good—God” or “No person is good—only God is good” +10:19 qs3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 Here Jesus quotes commands from the law that God gave to Moses. The first four commands and the sixth command come from either [Exodus 20:12–16](../exo/20/12.md) or [Deuteronomy 5:16–20](../deu/05/16.md). The fifth command is not directly quoted from the law that God gave Moses, but it may be a summary of the command found in [Exodus 20:17](../exo/20/17.md) or [Deuteronomy 5:21](../deu/05/21.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “You know the commandments—as you can read in the Scriptures, ‘Do not kill, do not commit adultery, do not steal, do not testify falsely, do not defraud, honor your father and your mother’” +10:19 vxpo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 Since in these commands God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the commands are singular. +10:19 hj3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ μοιχεύσῃς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adultery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “do not be an adulterer or adulteress” or “do not do what is adulterous” +10:20 qlbg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” +10:20 bd3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ νεότητός μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **youth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “since the time when I was a young man” or “from when I was a child” +10:21 ocri rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” +10:21 syq1 ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ 1 Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” +10:21 rd85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Here Jesus implies that the man should **give** the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “give what you earn to the poor” +10:21 ux1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Jesus is using the adjective poor as a noun to mean poor people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor” +10:21 a0hb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 3 Here, the word and introduces the result that will follow if the man does **sell** what he owns and **give to the poor**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and as a result” +10:21 iij4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δεῦρο, ἀκολούθει μοι 1 Here, the clause **come, follow me** is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “come with me as my student” +10:21 z24n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἀκολούθει μοι 1 Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words after **follow me**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “having taken up the cross” after the words **follow me**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +10:22 dxbx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces how the man reacted in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But then” +10:22 rg43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὁ & στυγνάσας ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ, ἀπῆλθεν λυπούμενος; ἦν γὰρ ἔχων κτήματα πολλά 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the third clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “because he was having many possessions, having become downcast at this word, he went away being grieved” +10:22 i5v3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom στυγνάσας 1 Here, the phrase **having become downcast** indicates that the man became sad and mournful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his face falling” or “having become mournful” +10:22 afu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 Here, **word** represents what Jesus just said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ statement” or “the words that Jesus said” +10:22 rczv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λυπούμενος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “being very sorrowful” +10:22 v58f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦν & ἔχων κτήματα πολλά 1 Here Mark implies that the young man did not want to sell these **possessions**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he was having many possessions that he did not want to sell” +10:23 fi28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πῶς δυσκόλως οἱ τὰ χρήματα ἔχοντες, εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελεύσονται 1 This is an exclamation that is emphasizing how difficult it is for rich people to **enter into the kingdom of God**. Use an exclamation that would communicate that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “You see that the ones having riches very difficultly enter into the kingdom of God!” or “Only with difficulty do the ones having riches enter into the kingdom of God!” +10:24 zqje rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & μαθηταὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο ἐπὶ τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus’ **words**. Alternate translation: “his words astonished the disciples” +10:24 z9z1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀποκριθεὶς 1 Here, the word **answering** indicates that Jesus is responding to how the disciples reacted to what he had said. He is not responding to something that they said to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “responding to their astonishment” or “in response” +10:24 fh1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνα 1 Here Jesus calls his disciples **Children** to indicate that they are under his spiritual care and that he cares for them. The disciples were not actually Jesus’ children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that a teacher or leader would use for the people whom that person teaches or leads. Alternate translation: “My dear disciples” or “Young men” +10:24 izt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἐστιν & εἰσελθεῖν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **it is to enter**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “it is for the ones trusting in riches to enter.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +10:25 f15k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 Here Jesus compares **a rich {person}** entering **the kingdom of God** with something that is impossible: **a camel** passing through **an eye of a needle**. Jesus does this to emphasize how hard it is for **a rich {person} to enter into the kingdom of God**. As [10:27](../10/27.md) shows, Jesus does not think that this is completely impossible, however. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea here in such a way that it does not sound as if it is totally impossible for **a rich {person} to enter into the kingdom of God**. Alternate translation: “Consider how difficult it is for a camel to pass through an eye of a needle. That illustrates how difficult it is for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God” +10:25 t4y8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος 1 The phrase **an eye of a needle** refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing needle through which the thread passes. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of tool or the hole in it, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term for a small opening. Alternate translation: “the small hole at the end of a needle” or “a very small hole” +10:26 vo65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέγοντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “what the disciples heard astonished them greatly, and they said” +10:26 mba6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Some ancient manuscripts read **to him**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “to themselves.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +10:26 fjex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι? 1 The disciples are using the question form to express their astonishment. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So it seems that no one is able to be saved.” or “So no one is able to be saved!” +10:26 fn25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τίς δύναται σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation: “who can receive salvation” or “whom will God save” +10:27 xo97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “All things are possible with God. Because of that, with men it is impossible, but not with God” +10:27 fhsq παρὰ ἀνθρώποις & παρὰ Θεῷ & παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ. 1 Alternate translation: “For men … for God … for God” +10:27 vfyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” +10:27 jg4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀδύνατον 1 Here Jesus is referring back to what the disciples asked about whether anyone can be saved (see [10:26](../10/26.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “being saved is impossible” +10:27 lpja rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but it is not impossible with God” +10:28 hcv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **Behold** is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the person to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Excuse me” or “Listen” +10:28 anas rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 By **we**, Peter means himself and the disciples but not Jesus, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +10:28 ua78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠκολουθήκαμέν σοι 1 Here, the phrase **have followed you** indicates that the disciples traveled with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have become your disciples” or “have traveled with you as your students” +10:29-30 mvyg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς & ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **no one** and the negative phrase **who will not receive**. Alternate translation: “everyone who … will receive” +10:29 m1w3 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his audience. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the truth and importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” +10:29 px2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word **you** here is plural. +10:29 qibm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 When Jesus says **for the sake of me and of the gospel**, he means that some people have **left** all these things because they are his disciples and because they believe the gospel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he is my disciple and believes the gospel” or “because he believes in me and in the gospel” +10:30 sjhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ἑκατονταπλασίονα 1 Here Jesus is using a round number (**100**) indicates a large number of **times**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression for a large number or state more explicitly that 100 is a round number. Alternate translation: “very many times as much” or “something like 100 times as much”\n +10:30 heb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νῦν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ & ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ 1 Here, the phrase **this time** refers to the time before God judges everyone and renews the world, and the phrase **the age that is coming** refers to the time after God judges everyone and renews the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable phrases or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “now in this life … in the life that is coming” or “now before God judges everyone … after God judges everyone” or “right now … later” +10:30 k1sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἀγροὺς, μετὰ διωγμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **persecutions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and lands, although that person will be persecuted” or “and lands, along with being persecuted” +10:30 dlki rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that person will live eternally” +10:31 k9su rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word But introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next thing, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Yes,” or “Indeed,” +10:31 ym7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὶ & ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 Here, Jesus is speaking of important or respected people as if they were **first** and of unimportant or non-respected people as if they were **last**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many respected will be non-respected, and non-respected, respected” or “many significant will be insignificant, and insignificant, significant” +10:31 y2lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πρῶτοι & καὶ ἔσχατοι 1 Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns to mean first and last people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “first people … and last people” or “people who are first … and people who are last” +10:31 e3ai rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and many last will be first” +10:32 sywf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later on,” or “After that,” +10:32 ttz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἀναβαίνοντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming up” +10:32 ebss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐθαμβοῦντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was how **Jesus was going ahead of them**. Alternate translation: “how he was going ahead amazed the disciples” +10:32 hq7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ & ἀκολουθοῦντες 1 Some people were walking **behind** Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” or “the other people who were traveling with them” +10:32 k1nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had chosen to be apostles” +10:33-34 l3e8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἀποκτενοῦσιν & ἀναστήσεται 1 Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, … me … me … me … me … me … kill me … I rise” +10:33 pv4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention:” or “Listen” 10:33 qkq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀναβαίνομεν 1 When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. -10:33 s1hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 In speaking of himself as **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” -10:33 ha2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the meaning behind the phrase **will be handed over** by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will deliver the Son of Man” -10:33 ohsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using a verbal form of this word, as modeled by the UST. -10:33 ils2 παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Alternate translation: “put him under the control of the Gentiles” -10:34 ccd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἀναστήσεται 1 In this verse Jesus continues referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. -10:34 t0lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐμπαίξουσιν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to “the Gentiles” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will mock him” -10:34 xv2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναστήσεται 1 The phrase **he will rise** refers to rising from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” or “he will rise from his grave” +10:33 s1hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἀναβαίνομεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “we are coming up” +10:33 ha2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone will hand the Son of Man over” +10:33 ohsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θανάτῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to die” +10:33 ils2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Here Jesus is speaking specifically of **Gentiles** who rule or control the the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Gentiles who rule” or “to the Gentiles who are in charge”\n +10:34 t0lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐμπτύσουσιν αὐτῷ 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would **spit on** someone to insult that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “spit on him to dishonor him”\n +10:34 ccd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **after three days** refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. See how you expressed this phrase in [8:31](../08/31.md). Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from then” +10:34 xv2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστήσεται 1 Here, the word **rise** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be restored to life” or “he will resurrect” +10:35 wxn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. It happened sometime soon after Jesus spoke the words recorded in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,” or “After Jesus said those things,” +10:35 ch2r θέλομεν ἵνα ὃ ἐὰν αἰτήσωμέν σε, ποιήσῃς ἡμῖν 1 Alternate translation: “if we ask you to do something for us, will you do it?” or “Please do for us whatever we ask you to do.” 10:35 li9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive θέλομεν & αἰτήσωμέν & ἡμῖν 1 Here, the pronouns **we** and **us** refer only to James and John, and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. -10:35 ch2r Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md). -10:36 he8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “to James and John” -10:37 xwf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “And James and John said to him” +10:36 he8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to James and John” +10:36 lyue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular θέλετε & ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the word **you** is plural throughout this verse. +10:37 xwf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John” 10:37 n1fv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δὸς ἡμῖν & καθίσωμεν 1 Here, the pronouns **us** and **we** refer only to James and John, so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. -10:37 bb98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “beside you when you rule in your kingdom” -10:37 kyg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** in another way such as using a verbal form of the word. Alternate translation: “next to you when you are glorified” or “sit by you when you are glorified” +10:37 mci1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative δὸς ἡμῖν 1 This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you grant to us” +10:37 bho1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction εἷς σου ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου καθίσωμεν ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 When someone sits at the **right hand** or at the **left hand** of a ruler, this symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “we might in your glory sit down to rule, one at your right hand and one at your left hand” or “we might in your glory take the places of honor and authority, one at your right hand and one at your left hand” +10:37 bb98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with you when you rule gloriously” or “with you when you become a great ruler” +10:37 kyg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with you when you are glorified” or “by you when you are glorious” +10:37 d5h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἷς σου ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου 1 Here, the phrases **at your right hand** and **at your left hand** refer to the places next to Jesus’ right and left hands, which would be the right side and the left side. In the Jesus’ culture, these sides were associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side” and “left side.” Make sure that your readers understand that these sides indicate that the two sons of Zebedee would have honor and authority when they sit there. Alternate translation: “one next to you on the right and one next to you on the left” or “one in the honorable place at your right and one in the honorable place at your left” +10:38 otfd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what James and John asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” +10:38 j8md rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular οὐκ οἴδατε & αἰτεῖσθε & δύνασθε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the words **You** and **you** are plural throughout this verse. 10:38 v1bf οὐκ οἴδατε 1 Alternate translation: “You do not understand” -10:38 yvu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω 1 The phrase **to drink the cup** is an idiom which refers to suffering some experience which is difficult to undergo or experience. In the Bible, suffering is often referred to as “drinking from a cup.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “suffer as I will suffer” or “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering from which I will drink” -10:38 pax6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι 1 The phrase **to be baptized with the baptism** is a metaphor which refers to being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering and trials overwhelm a person. Here this metaphor for suffering refers specifically to Jesus’ future suffering in Jerusalem and his death by crucifixion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. -10:38 hlue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι 1 The phrase **I am being baptized** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. -10:39 r3pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John” -10:39 hc1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε 1 **The cup that I drink** is an idiom. See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. -10:39 c15v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 In this verse Jesus continues to use **baptism** to mean something more. See how you translated Jesus’ symbolic use of baptism in the previous verse. -10:39 humc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 The phrase **I am being baptized** and the phrase **you will be baptized** are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state these two phrases in active form as modeled by the UST or you can express the meaning in another way that is natural in your language. -10:40 pdc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται 1 The word **{it}** refers to the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared by God” -10:40 eu9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡτοίμασται 1 The phrase **it has been prepared** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says in [Matthew 20:23](../mat/20/23.md) that God the Father is the one who will prepare these places. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” -10:41 ad19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀκούσαντες 1 The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. -10:41 i48d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ δέκα 1 Here, **the ten** refers to the other ten disciples of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. -10:42 sbk8 προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Alternate translation: “after Jesus called his disciples to him, he” -10:42 zfr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the idea behind this abstract noun in another way, as modeled by the UST. -10:43 zfz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχ οὕτως & ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 The phrase **it is not this way among you** means “this is not the reality you live by as my followers” or “it should not be this way among you.” The phrase refers back to the way that Jesus said the Gentile rulers governed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But you live by a different set of principles than do the Gentile rulers” or “But you are to act differently than the Gentile rulers act” +10:38 yvu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω 1 Here Jesus speaks of experiencing pain and suffering as if it were drinking from a **cup**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to drink the cup of suffering which I drink” or “to experience the pain that I am about to experience” +10:38 nesy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 Here, cup represents the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would probably have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the drink” or “the wine in the cup” +10:38 pax6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι 1 Here Jesus speaks of being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances and pain as if it were **being baptized**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be baptized in the painful circumstances in which I am about to be baptized” or “to be overwhelmed by difficult things like I am about to be overwhelmed” +10:38 osye rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ & βαπτισθῆναι 1 The expression **with the baptism with which** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “to be baptized as” +10:38 hlue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “to have someone baptize you … someone will baptize me” +10:39 r3pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John” +10:39 vwd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis δυνάμεθα 1 The James and John are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We are able to drink that cup and be baptized with that baptism” or “We are able to undergo those things” +10:39 qb9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” +10:39 hc1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε 1 Here Jesus continues to speak of experiencing pain and suffering as if it were drinking from a **cup**. See how you translated this figure of speech in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “The cup of suffering that I drink, you will drink” or “The pain that I am about to experience, you will experience” +10:39 ensf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 Here, **cup** represents the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would probably have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the idea in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “the drink” or “the wine in the cup” +10:39 rdbo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular πίεσθε & βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the word **you** is plural throughout this verse. +10:39 c15v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 Here Jesus continues to speak of being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances and pain as if it were **being baptized**. See how you translated this figure of speech in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “in the painful circumstances in which I am about to be baptized, you will be baptized” or “by the difficult things that I am about to be overwhelmed by, you will be overwhelmed” +10:39 xc19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι 1 The expression **with the baptism with which** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. See how you expressed the idea in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “as I am being baptized” +10:39 humc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. See how you expressed the idea in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “someone is baptizing me, someone will baptize you” +10:40 uoq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τὸ & καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων 1 When someone sits at the **right hand** or at the **left hand** of a ruler, this symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. See how you translated the similar phrases in [10:37](../10/37.md). Alternate translation: “to sit down to rule at my right hand and at my left hand” or “to take the places of honor and authority at my right hand and at my left hand” +10:40 sk68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων 1 Here, the phrases **at my right hand** and **at my left hand** refer to the places next to Jesus’ right and left hands, which would be the right side and the left side. In the Jesus’ culture, these sides were associated with honor or authority. See how you expressed the idea in [10:37](../10/37.md). Alternate translation: “next to me on the right or next to me on the left” or “in the honorable places at my right or at my left” +10:40 a4g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ οἷς 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but it will be given to the ones for whom” +10:40 pdc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡτοίμασται 1 Here, the word **it** refers to sitting in the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to sit in those places has been prepared” or “it has been prepared to do that” +10:40 eu9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡτοίμασται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” +10:41 ad19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀκούσαντες 1 Here Mark implies that the **ten** disciples **heard** about what James and John had asked Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having heard that James and John had asked to sit at Jesus’ right hand and left hand” +10:41 i48d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ δέκα 1 Mark is using the number **ten** as a noun to refer to the other ten disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this number with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other ten disciples” or “the rest of the disciples” +10:42 itdt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular οἴδατε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word **You** here is plural. +10:42 sbk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυριεύουσιν αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι αὐτῶν κατεξουσιάζουσιν αὐτῶν 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than and in order to show that the second clause is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses Alternate translation: “the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles lord it over them; indeed, their great ones exercise authority over them” or “the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles and their great ones lord it over them” +10:42 ru5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Gentiles consider to be their rulers” +10:42 u9gu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατακυριεύουσιν & κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 The words translated **lord it over** and **exercise authority over** refer to using power to control and dominate others. The words do not indicate whether the rulers and the great ones are doing good or bad things with their power. If possible, use words or phrases that refer to total control and domination but that do not imply good or bad use of that control and domination. Alternate translation: “reign absolutely over … have complete authority over” +10:42 zfr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “rule over” or “control” +10:43 zfz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative οὐχ οὕτως & ἐστιν 1 Here Jesus could be using the present tense to: (1) give a command or instruction. Alternate translation: “It should not be this way” or “Let it not be this way” (2) state how things work differently among his disciples. Alternate translation: “That is not how it is” +10:43 zyzc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν & ὑμῖν & ὑμῶν 1 Because is talking to the disciples, the words **you**, **you**, and **your** are plural. +10:43-44 rt9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὃς ἂν θέλῃ μέγας γενέσθαι ἐν ὑμῖν, ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος & καὶ ὃς ἂν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι πρῶτος, ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος 1 These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the sentences with a word other than and in order to show that the second sentence is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two sentences Alternate translation: “whoever desires to become great among you will be your servant; indeed, whoever desires to be first among you will be your slave” or “whoever desires to become first or great among will you be your servant or slave” 10:43 fc3m μέγας γενέσθαι 1 Alternate translation: “to be highly respected” or “to be greatly respected” -10:43 gfun rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **will be your servant** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md) where it occurs with the same meaning and in a similar context. Alternate translation: “must be your servant” -10:44 e7sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἶναι πρῶτος 1 Here, **to be first** means being the most important. See how you translated **first** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “to be the most important” -10:44 qzo8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **will be a slave of all** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [10:43](../10/43.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all” -10:44 u5yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔσται & δοῦλος 1 Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. as modeled by the UST. -10:45 ctta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST. -10:45 pmk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go οὐκ ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth” -10:45 a3fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διακονηθῆναι 1 The phrase **to be served** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him” -10:45 rik1 διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι 1 Alternate translation: “to be served by people, but to serve people” -10:45 d9jd ἀντὶ πολλῶν 1 Alternate translation: “in place of many people’s lives” or “in exchange for many people” -10:46 n4i3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Ἰερειχώ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “go” or “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went into Jericho” -10:46 bq3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ 1 Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “as he is coming out” -10:47 ow3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός 1 The people call Jesus **Jesus the Nazarene** because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus from the town of Nazareth” -10:47 opm0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Here, Mark uses **And** to introduce a reason-result statement. **And** introduces the reason, **having heard that it was Jesus**, which resulted in Bartimaeus beginning **to cry out and to say, “Son of David, Jesus, have mercy on me!”** When the blind man learned that Jesus was walking by, he knew that Jesus would hear him if he called out, so as a result, he shouted to him. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason-result statement. Alternate translation: “So” -10:47 ynr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 The blind man is using the word **Son** to mean “descendant.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” -10:47 vwz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 **David** was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title **Son of David** implicitly meant “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “Messiah” -10:47 ylls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλέησόν με 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** by using an adjective form such as “merciful” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me” -10:47 s2dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἐλέησόν με 1 The phrase **have mercy** is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add a word such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please be merciful to me” -10:47 tvkh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλέησόν με 1 The blind man assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “please have mercy on me and heal me” or “please be merciful to me by healing me” -10:48 ca5u ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ πολλοὶ ἵνα σιωπήσῃ 1 Alternate translation: “many people kept telling him not to shout” -10:48 m32u πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν 1 The phrase **was crying out much more** could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. (2) that the blind man called out even more persistently. Alternate translation: “called out even more persistently” -10:48 l86a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με 1 See how you decided to translate this phrase in [10:47](../010/47.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah, please have mercy on me and heal me” -10:49 ac7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns φωνοῦσι 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who **they** refers to. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called” -10:49 n6xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάρσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **courage** by using an adjective form such as “courageous” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous” -10:52 s5d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s **faith**. Jesus heals the man because the man believes that Jesus can heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, this could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you have believed in me” -10:52 bjuw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “trusted,” as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the meaning of **faith** some other way that is natural in your language. +10:43 gfun rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται 1 Jesus is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. See how you translated the similar form in [9:35](../09/35.md). Alternate translation: “should be” or “has to be”\n +10:44 bhbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word **you** here is plural. +10:44 e7sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρῶτος 1 Here, Jesus is speaking of being important or respected as if it were being **first**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated this word in [9:35](../09/35.md). Alternate translation: “respected” or “significant”\n +10:44 qzo8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται 1 Jesus is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. See how you translated the similar form in [9:35](../09/35.md). Alternate translation: “should be” or “has to be” +10:44 u5yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος 1 Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. Alternate translation: “will dedicate himself or herself to serve all” or “will work hard at helping all” +10:44 mn3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντων 1 Jesus is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the other disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all the other disciples” or “the rest of the disciples” +10:45 pnmd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the disciples should act like servants and slaves for other disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for commands, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I command that because” +10:45 ctta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, … my” +10:45 h0j5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐκ ἦλθεν διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι, καὶ δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “came to serve and to give his life as a ransom in exchange for many, not to be served” +10:45 pmk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἦλθεν 1 Here, the word **come** refers to the Son of Man entering this world as a human to do what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did not come to this world” or “is not acting” +10:45 a3fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διακονηθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “for people to serve him” or “to have people serve him” +10:45 rik1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but he came to serve” +10:45 d9jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν 1 Here Jesus speaks as if his **life** were a price or **ransom** he would **give** to free **many** from someone or something that owned or controlled them. He means that he will obtain forgiveness for his people’s sins and will keep those sins from controlling them. This is an important biblical image, so if possible preserve the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “to offer his life as if it were a ransom to set many free from sin” +10:45 c46w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to allow himself to die” +10:45 xuny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλῶν 1 Jesus is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women” +10:46 thxd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,” +10:46 n4i3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go” +10:46 bq3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming out” +10:46 z3mo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης, ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 Here Mark introduces **Bartimaeus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man sitting beside the road. His name was Bartimaeus, son of Timaeus. He was a blind beggar” +10:46 iosi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης 1 Here, the phrase **son of Timaeus** could: (1) identify the father of **Bartimaeus**. Alternate translation: “Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, whose father was Timaeaus” (2) explain what the name **Bartimaeus** means. Alternate translation: “Bartimaeus, which means ‘son of Timaeus,’ a blind beggar” +10:46 hzis rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος 1 The words **Bartimaues** and **Timaeus** are the names of men. +10:47 ow3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἀκούσας ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός ἐστιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘It is Jesus the Nazarene,’” +10:47 ynr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 Here, the word **Son** means a male descendant. It does not mean that Jesus was the direct son of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” or “You who are descended from David” +10:47 vwz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 **David** was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title **Son of David** implicitly meant “Messiah.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Messiah” +10:47 s2dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἐλέησόν με 1 The phrase **have mercy** is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add a word such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you have mercy on me” +10:47 ylls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλέησόν με 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me” +10:47 tvkh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλέησόν με 1 The Bartimaeus assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “have mercy on me and heal me” or “be merciful to me by healing me” +10:48 ca5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ 1 Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men” +10:48 m32u πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν 1 The phrase **was crying out much more** could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. Alternate translation: “was crying out even louder” (2) that the blind man called out even more frequently or persistently. Alternate translation: “was crying out even more often” or “was crying out even more persistently” +10:48 l86a Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με 1 Here Bartimaeus says the same thing he said in [10:47](../10/47.md) except he does not include the name Jesus. Express the idea as you did there. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David, I ask that you be merciful to me” or “You who are descended from David, please have mercy on me and heal me” +10:49 pgfm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν, φωνήσατε αὐτόν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “said to call him” +10:49 po5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular φωνήσατε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to some of the people in the crowd, the command **Call** is plural. +10:49 ac7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns φωνοῦσι 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called” +10:49 n6xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάρσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous” +10:49 py8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγειρε 1 Here the people who are speaking to Bartimaeus imply that he should walk to where Jesus was after getting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Get up and walk over to him” or “Get up and go to where he is” +10:50 rhrr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀποβαλὼν τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ 1 Bartimaeus’ **coat** would have been an outer garment that people could ordinarily take off in public. Bartimaeus probably took it off so that it would be easier for him to hurry to where Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some or all of that information more explicit. Alternate translation: “having thrown aside his jacket” or “having thrown aside his coat so that he could move faster” +10:50 bf2a ἀναπηδήσας 1 Alternate translation: “having quickly gotten to his feet” or “having immediately stood up” +10:50 jc66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” +10:51 qm1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν, τί σοι θέλεις ποιήσω? 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked him what he desired him to do for him” +10:51 fcin rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Ραββουνεί, ἵνα 1 Bartimaeus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, I desire that” +10:51 ish0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναβλέψω 1 Here, Bartimaeus could be implying: (1) that he once could see, and he wants to be able to see once more. Alternate translation: “I might regain my sight” (2) that he wants to be able to see for the first time. Alternate translation: “I might gain my sight” or “I might be able to see” +10:52 bjuw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You believed, and that has caused you to be saved” +10:52 s5d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Jesus speaks of Bartimaeus’ faith as if it had actively saved him. He means that his faith was the necessary condition for the healing that he received from God. Alternate translation: “Because of your faith, you have been saved” +10:52 omxe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνέβλεψεν 1 Here, much as in [10:51](../10/51.md), Mark could be implying: (1) that Bartimaeus once could see, and now he can see once more. Alternate translation: “he regained his sight” (2) that Bartimaeus could see for the first time. Alternate translation: “he gained his sight” or “he was able to see” +10:52 co2v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 Here, the clause **he was following him on the road** could indicate that: (1) Bartimaeus traveled with Jesus and was his disciple. Alternate translation: “he became his disciple” or “he traveled with him on the road as his student” (2) Bartimaeus walked with Jesus on the road. Alternate translation: “he walked with him on the road” or “he went with him on the road” 11:intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [Mark 11:9–10](../mrk/11/09.md) and [Mark 11:17](../mrk/11/17.md), which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The donkey and the colt\n\nJesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.\n\nMatthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both; the donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1–7](../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1–7](../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29–36](../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14–15](../jhn/12/14.md)) 11:1 ch4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐγγίζουσιν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went near” 11:1 g1fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 The word **Bethphage** is the name of a village.